B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering...

206
1 RashtreeyaSikshanaSamithi Trust R.V COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING (Autonomous Institution affiliated to VTU, Belagavi) R.V. Vidyaniketan Post, Mysuru Road Bengaluru 560 059 SCHEME & SYLLABUS 3 rd to 8 th Semesters B.E-Telecommunication Engineering (2016 Scheme)

Transcript of B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering...

Page 1: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

1

RashtreeyaSikshanaSamithi Trust

R.V COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING (Autonomous Institution affiliated to VTU, Belagavi)

R.V. Vidyaniketan Post, Mysuru Road

Bengaluru – 560 059

SCHEME & SYLLABUS

3rd to 8th Semesters

B.E-Telecommunication Engineering (2016 Scheme)

Page 2: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

2

Department Vision

Imparting quality education in Electronics and Telecommunication

Engineering through focus on fundamentals, research and innovation for

sustainable development

Department Mission

Provide comprehensive education that prepares students to contribute

effectively to the profession and society in the field of Telecommunication.

Create state-of-the–art infrastructure to integrate a culture of research with

a focus on Telecommunication Engineering Education

Encourage students to be innovators to meet local and global needs with

ethical practice

Create an environment for faculty to carry out research and contribute in

their field of specialization, leading to Center of Excellence with focus on

affordable innovation.

Establish a strong and wide base linkage with industries, R&D organization

and academic Institutions.

Page 3: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

3

PROGRAM EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEOs)

PEO Description

PEO1 Acquire appropriate knowledge of the fundamentals of basic

sciences, mathematics, engineering sciences, Electronics &

Telecommunication engineering so as to adapt to rapidly

changing technology

PEO2 Think critically to analyze, evaluate, design and solve

complex technical and managerial problems through

research and innovation.

PEO3 Function and communicate effectively demonstrating team

spirit, ethics, respectful and professional behaviour.

PEO4 To face challenges through lifelong learning for global

acceptance.

Page 4: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

4

PROGRAM OUTCOMES (POs)

1. Engineering knowledge: Apply the knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering

fundamentals, and an engineering specialisation for the solution of complex engineering

problems.

2. Problem analysis: Identify, formulate, research literature, and analyse complex

engineering problems reaching substantiated conclusions using first principles of

mathematics, natural sciences, and engineering sciences.

3. Design/development of solutions: Design solutions for complex engineering problems

and design system components or processes that meet t h e specified needs with appropriate

consideration for public health and safety, and cultural, societal, and environmental

considerations.

4. Conduct investigations of complex problems: Use research-based knowledge and

research methods including design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data, and

synthesis of the information to provide valid conclusions.

5. Modern tool usage: Create, select, and apply appropriate techniques, resources, and

modern engineering and IT tools, including prediction and modelling to complex engineering

activities, with an understanding of the limitations.

6. The engineer and society: Apply reasoning informed by the contextual knowledge to

assess societal, health, safety, legal, and cultural issues and the consequent responsibilities

relevant to the professional engineering practice.

7. Environment and sustainability: Understand the impact of the professional engineering

solutions in societal and environmental contexts, and demonstrate the knowledge of, and need

for sustainable development.

8. Ethics: Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and responsibilities and

norms of the engineering practice.

9. Individual and team work: Function effectively as an individual, and as a member or

leader in diverse teams, and in multidisciplinary settings.

10. Communication: Communicate effectively on complex engineering activities with the

engineering community and with t h e society at large, such as, being able to comprehend and

write effective reports and design documentation, make effective presentations, and give and

receive clear instructions.

11. Project management and finance: Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the

engineering and management principles and apply these to one’s own work, as a member and

leader in a team, to manage projects and in multidisciplinary environments.

Page 5: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

5

12. Life-long learning: Recognise the need for, and have the preparation and ability to

engage in independent and life-long learning in the broadest context of technological change.

PROGRAM SPECIFIC OUTCOMES (PSOs)

PSO Description

PSO1 Analyze, design and implement emerging Telecommunications

systems using devices, sub-systems, propagation models, networking

of Wireless and Wire line communication systems.

PSO2 Exhibit Technical skills necessary to choose careers in the design,

installation, testing, management and operation of Telecommunication

systems.

Lead Society: IEEE

Page 6: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

6

Curriculum Design Process

Page 7: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

7

Academic Planning and Implementation

PROCESS FOR COURSE OUTCOME ATTAINMENT

Page 8: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

8

Final CO Attainment Process

Page 9: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

9

Program Outcome Attainment Process

Guidelines for Fixing Targets

The target may be fixed based on last 3 years’ average attainment

Course (Syllabus)

CO Attainment

CO –PO Mapping

PO Attainment

DIRECT

PO Attainment

80%

PO Attainment

INDIRECT Alumni Survey Employer Survey

Senior Exit Survey

20%

Page 10: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

10

Page 11: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

11

Credits Distribution as per UGC/VTU

Sl. No. Category Percentage (%) Minimum No. of

credits

2016 scheme

Without Mini Project With Mini Project

1 Humanities 5-10 10 9+2 9+2

2 Basic Science 15-20 30 30 30

3 Engineering Science 15-20 30 30 30

4 Professional Core

Courses (PC) 30-40 60

78+3=81

(3 credits core in place of Minor

project in 7th semester)

81-3=78

(3 Credits for minor

project in 7th

semester)

5 Professional Elective

Courses 10-15 20 20 20

6 Other Electives 5-10 10 10 10

7 Project Work 10-15 20 16+2

Major project +Tech. Seminar

16+2+3

Major project

+Tech. Seminar

+Mini Project

200 200

Page 12: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

12

R. V. COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING, BENGALURU – 59.

(An Autonomous Institution affiliated to VTU, Belgavi)

DEPARTMENT OF TELECOMMUNICATION ENGINEERING SCHEME OF TEACHING AND EXAMINATION

THIRD SEMESTER

Sl.

No. Course Code Course Title BoS

Credit Allocation Total

Credits Lecture Tutorial Practical SS (EL)

1 16MA31B Discrete and Integral Transforms Maths 3 1 0 0 4

2 16ET32 Environmental Technology BT 2 0 0 0 2

3 16TE33 Analog Electronic Circuits TE 3 0 1 1 5

4 16TE34 Digital Logic Design TE

3 0 1 1 5

5 16TE35 Network Analysis TE

3 1 0 1 5

6 16TE36 Fields And Waves TE

3 1 0 0 4

7 16DMA37/

16DCS37

Bridge Course Mathematics

/Bridge Course C Programming *

Maths/

CSE 2 0 0 0 0

Total No. of Credits 25

No. Of Hrs. 17+2* 6 4 12** 29

*Mandatory Audit course for lateral entry diploma students

**Non contact hours

#ME/IM/AS Common #EC/TC/EE/EI Common ## CS/IS/BT Common

1Hr. Theory= 1 credit 2Hrs. Practical=1credit 2Hrs. Tutorial=1 credit 4Hrs. SS(EL) = 1 Credit

Page 13: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

13

The EC,CS,EE,IS,TE,EI programs will have 16DCS37 in 3rd semester and 16DMA47 in 4th semester.

The ME,CH,IM,CV,BT,AS programs will have 16DMA37 in 3rd semester and 16DSC47 in 4th semester

Programs Semester Course Code/ Course

Title Semester

Course Code / Course

Title

EC,CS,EE,IS,TE,EI 3

16DCS37

Bridge Course C

Programming

4

16DMA47

Bridge Course

Mathematics

ME,CH,IM,CV,BT,AS 3

16DMA37

Bridge Course

Mathematics

4

16DSC47

Bridge Course C

Programming

The EC,CS,EE,IS,TE,EI programs will have 16ET32 in 3rd semester and 16EM42/16EB42 in 4th semester.

The ME,CH,IM,CV,BT,AS programs will have 16EM32/16EB32 in 3rd semester and 16ET42 in 4th semester

Programs Semester Course Code/ Course

Title Semester

Course Code / Course

Title

EC,CS,EE,IS,TE,EI 3

16ET32

Environmental

Technology

4

16EM42/16EB42

Engineering

Materials/Biology for

Engineers

ME,CH,IM,CV,BT,AS 3

16EM32/12EB32

Engineering

Materials/Biology for

Engineers

4

16ET42

Environmental

Technology

Page 14: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

14

R. V. COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING, BENGALURU – 59.

(An Autonomous Institution affiliated to VTU, Belgavi)

DEPARTMENT OF TELECOMMUNICATION ENGINEERING SCHEME OF TEACHING AND EXAMINATION

FOURTH SEMESTER

Sl.

No Course Code Course Title BOS

Credit Allocation Total

Credits Lecture Tutorial Practical SS

(EL)

1 16MA41B Linear Algebra & Probability

Theory Maths 3 1 0 0 4

2 16EM42 Engineering Materials EC 2 0 0 0 2

3 16TE43 Analog Communication TE 3 0 1 1 5

4 16TE44 Signals and Systems TE 3 1 0 0 4

5 16TE45 Microprocessor And

Microcontrollers TE 3 0 1 1 5

6 16TE46 Data Structures Using C++ TE 3 0 0 1 4

7 16HS47

Professional Practice-II (Team

Work and Professional

Ethics)$

HSS 0 0 0 0 1

8 16DMA48/

16DCS48

Bridge Course Mathematics*

/ Bridge Course C

Programming **

Maths/CSE 2 0 0 0 0

Total No. of Credits 25

No. Of Hrs. 17+2* 4 4 12** 27

*Mandatory Audit course for lateral entry diploma students **Non contact hours

Page 15: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

15

$ 3 days (18 Hrs) in 3RD semester and 3 days (18 Hrs) in 4th semester, in the event of student not able to take the regular allotment, may have to

complete this credit by attending other branch program. # BT, CV, CH, Chemistry will handle classes

1Hr. Theory= 1 credit 2Hrs. Practical=1credit 2Hrs. Tutorial=1 credit 4Hrs. SS(EL) = 1 Credit

Bridge Course Mathematics** / Bridge Course C Programming **

EC,CS,EE,IS,TE,EI 16DCS37 16DMA47

ME,CH,IM,CV,BT,AS 16DMA37 16DSC47

Engineering Materials/Biology for Engineers AND Environmental Technology

EC,CS,EE,IS,TE,EI 12ET32 12EM42/12EB42

ME,CH,IM,CV,BT,AS 12EM32/12EB32 12ET42

Page 16: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

16

Page 17: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

17

Semester: III

Course Title: Discrete and Integral Transforms(COMMON TO ECE, TC, EI, EEE)

Course Code: 16MA31B CIE Marks: 100

Hrs/Week: L:T:P:S: 3:1:0:0 SEE Marks: 100

Credits: 04 SEE Duration: 3Hrs

Course Learning Objectives: The students will be able to

1 Comprehend the existence and the role of transforms, inverse transforms and Fourier

series in engineering problems.

2 Learn to find transform and inverse transform of continuous, discontinuous and discrete

functions.

3 Develop the knowledge of periodic functions as a Fourier series subject to Dirichlet’s

conditions and derive the Fourier series using Euler’s formulae.

4 Identify and solve initial and boundary value problems, interpret the physical

significance of solutions using transform methods

UNIT-I

LAPLACE TRANSFORM

Existence and uniqueness of Laplace Transform (LT), Transform of elementary

functions, RoC. Properties of LT : Linearity, change of scale and first shifting.

Transform of function multiplied by tn, division by t, derivatives and integral. LT

of periodic function, Heaviside unit step function, Unit impulse function.

Heaviside shift (second shift) theorem.

08 Hrs

UNIT-II

INVERSE LAPLACE TRANSFORM

Definition, properties of inverse Laplace transform, evaluation using different

methods. Convolution theorem, problems. Application to solve ordinary linear

differential equations and simultaneous differential equations.

08 Hrs

UNIT-III

FOURIER SERIES: Introduction, periodic function, even and odd functions, properties. Special

waveforms - square wave, half wave rectifier, saw-tooth wave and triangular

wave. Dirichlet’s conditions, Euler’s formula for Fourier series, Fourier series for

functions of period 2L (particular cases) - problems. Half Range Fourier series-

Construction of Half range cosine and sine series. Parseval’s theorem for Root

mean square value of a function. Complex form of Fourier series.

08 Hrs

UNIT-IV

FOURIER TRANSFORM

Fourier Integral theorem, Complex Fourier transform, Fourier sine transform,

Fourier cosine transform, Properties of FT, Convolution theorem, Parseval’s

identity, Applications of FT.

08 Hrs

UNIT-V

Z TRANSFORM

Introduction, Z transform of standard functions, Linearity property, damping rule,

shifting theorem, initial and final value theorems, convergence of Z transform,

RoC, inverse Z transform using power series and partial fraction methods,

convolution theorem, application to difference equations.

08 Hrs

Course Outcomes: After completing the course, the students will be able to

1 Understand the significance of fundamental concepts of transforms and inverse

Page 18: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

18

transforms, even & odd functions, periodic phenomena.

2 Demonstrate the properties of transforms and inverse transforms, graphical

representation of various wave forms.

3 Evaluate transforms of periodic, discontinuous and discrete functions, develop Fourier

series of various type of functions.

4 Apply transform techniques to solve Differential equations and Difference equations in

engineering problems

Text Books

1. B.S. Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Khanna Publishers, 40th Edition, 2007,

ISBN: 81-7409-195-5.

2. B. V. Ramana, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2008, ISBN: 13-

978-07-063419-0; ISBN: 10-0-07-063419-X.

Reference Books

1. Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition,

2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6.

2. N.P Bali & Manish Goyal, A Text Book of Engineering Mathematics, Lakshmi

Publications, 7th Edition, 2010, ISBN: 978-81-7008-992-6.

In case of a course having only theory, the following minimum guidelines may be

followed.

Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE)

( Theory – 100 Marks)

Evaluation method Course with Assignment

Quiz -1 10

Test -1 30

Quiz -2 10

Quiz -3 10

Test -2 30

Assignments 10

Total 100

Semester End Evaluation

Theory (100)

Part- –A

Objective type questions 20

Part –B

There should be five questions from five units. Each question should be for maximum

of 16 Marks.

The UNIT-1, UNIT-4 and UNIT-5 should not have any choice.

The UNIT-2 and UNIT-3 should have an internal choice.

Both the questions should be of the same complexity in terms of COs and Bloom’s

taxonomy level.

80

Page 19: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

19

Total 100

Note: The faculty teaching the course may adapt additional methods for evaluation

within the total maximum marks.

What To

whom

Frequency

of

conductio

n

Max

Mark

s

Evidence Contribution to

Course Outcome

Dir

ect

Ass

essm

ent

Met

hod

s CIE

Quiz

Student

s

Three 30 Answer

Scripts 80

%

100

%

90

%

Test Two 60/50

Assignment/Self

-study 2 phases 10/20

Reports /

Record

Books Laboratory Weekly 50

SE

E

Semester End

Examination

End of

every

semester

Consisting

of Part-A

and Part-B

100

Answer

Scripts

20

%

Semester End

Laboratory

End of

every

semester

laboratory

50

Ind

irec

t A

ssess

men

t

met

hod

s

Course End Survey Student

s

End of

course

Questionnair

e

Based on

COs

10%

Note: Individual faculty may adopt various methods for conducting effective quizzes

and evaluate the same. The frequency of quizzes may be more than three also.

CO-PO Mapping

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 H M --- --- --- --- --- --- --- L --- L

CO2 H M M L --- --- --- --- --- L --- L

CO3 H H M M M --- --- --- --- L --- L

CO4 H H H H M --- --- --- --- L --- L

Low-1Medium-2 High-3

Page 20: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

20

Semester: III

Course Title: Environmental Technology

Course Code: 16ET32 CIE Marks: 50

Hrs/Week: L:T:P:S: 2:0:0:0 SEE Marks: 50

Credits: 02 SEE Duration: 1.5 Hrs

Course Learning Objectives: The students will be able to

1 Understand the various components of environment and the significance of the

sustainability of healthy environment.

2 Recognize the implications of different types of the wastes produced by natural and

anthropogenic activity.

3 Learn the strategies to recover the energy from the waste.

4 Design the models that help mitigate or prevent the negative impact of proposed

activity on the environment.

UNIT-I

INTRODUCTION: Environment - Components of environment, Ecosystem –

Types and structure of ecosystem. Impact of agriculture, mining, transportation

and anthropogenic activities on environment and their assessment in sustainable

development. Environmental acts & regulations, Role of government, legal

aspects, role of non governmental organizations (NGOs), environmental education

& women empowerment, ISO 14000, Environmental Impact Assessment.

05 Hrs

UNIT-II

ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION: Air, noise, land pollution, public health

aspects. Global environmental issues – Population growth, urbanization, land

management, water & waste water management. Air pollution – point and non

point sources of air pollution, global warming, acid rain & ozone depletion and

their controlling measures (particulate and gaseous contaminants). Solid waste

management, e waste management & biomedical waste management – sources,

characteristics & disposal methods. Concepts of Reduce, Reuse and Recycling of

the wastes.

06 Hrs

UNIT-III

WATER POLLUTION: Water resources – availability and quality aspects, water

borne diseases & water induced diseases, heavy metals & fluoride problems in

drinking water and ground water contamination. Eutrophication, advanced waste

water treatment, nutrient removal. Energy – Different types of energy,

conventional sources & non conventional sources of energy, solar energy, hydro

electric energy, wind energy, Nuclear energy, Biomass & Biogas Fossil Fuels,

Hydrogen as an alternative energy.

05 Hrs

UNIT-IV

GREEN TECHNOLOGY: Green buildings, green materials, soilless cultivation

(hydroponics), sustainable manuring technology, organic oriented farming, use of

biofuels, carbon foot prints, Opportunities for green technology markets, carbon

capture and storage.

04 Hrs

UNIT-V

RESOURCE RECOVERY SYSTEM: Processing techniques, materials

recovery systems, biological conversion (composting and anaerobic digestion).

Thermal conversion products (combustion, incineration, gasification, pyrolysis,

use of Refuse Derived Fuels).

05 Hrs

Page 21: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

21

Course Outcomes: After completing the course, the students will be able to

1 Identify the components of environment and exemplify the detrimental impact of

anthropogenic activities on the environment.

2 Differentiate the various types of wastes and suggest appropriate safe technological

methods to manage the waste.

3 Aware of different renewable energy resources and can analyse the nature of waste and

propose methods to extract clean energy.

4 Adopt the appropriate recovering methods to recover the essential resources from the

wastes for reuse or recycling.

Text Books

1. Gilbert, M.M. 2004. Introduction to environmental engineering and science. 2nd

Edition, Pearson Education. ISBN: 8129072770

2. Howard S. Peavy, Donald R. Rowe and George Tchobanoglous. 2000. Environmental

Engineering, McGraw Hill Series in water resources and Environmental Engg. ISBN:

0070491348

Reference Books

1. G. Tyler Miller (Author), Scott Spoolman (Author), (2012) Environmental Science –

15th edition, Publisher: Brooks Cole, ISBN-13: 978-1305090446 ISBN-10: 130509044

2. Vijay Kulkarni and T. V. Ramachandra 2009. Environment Management. TERI Press;

ISBN: 8179931846, 9788179931844

3. Sven Erik Jørgensen 2002. Integration of Ecosystem Theories: A Pattern Ecology &

Environment; Edition 3, Springer; ISBN: 1402007558, 9781402007552

4. Gerald Kiely 1997. Environmental Engineering. McGraw-Hill; ISBN: 9780077091279

5. Linvil Gene Rich 2003. Environmental Systems Engineering, McGraw-Hill; ISBN:

9780070522503

6. Larry Canter 1995. “Environmental Impact Assessment”, McGraw-Hill. ISBN:

0070097674

In case of a course having only theory, the following minimum guidelines may be

followed.

Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE)

( Theory – 50Marks)

Evaluation method Course with Assignment

Quiz -1 05

Test -1 15

Quiz -2 05

Quiz -3 05

Test -2 15

Assignment 05

Total 50

`

Page 22: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

22

Semester End Evaluation

Theory (50)

Part- –A

Objective type questions 10

Part –B

There should be five questions from five units. Each question should be for maximum

of 16 Marks.

The UNIT-1, UNIT-4 and UNIT-5 should not have any choice.

The UNIT-2 and UNIT-3 should have an internal choice.

Both the questions should be of the same complexity in terms of COs and Bloom’s

taxonomy level.

40

Total 50

Note: The faculty teaching the course may adapt additional methods for evaluation

within the total maximum marks.

Page 23: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

23

What To

whom

Frequency

of

conductio

n

Max

Mark

s

Evidence Contribution to

Course Outcome

Dir

ect

Ass

essm

ent

Met

hod

s CIE

Quiz

Student

s

Three 30 Answer

Scripts 80

%

100

%

90

%

Test Two 60/50

Assignment/Self

-study 2 phases 10/20

Reports /

Record

Books Laboratory Weekly 50

SE

E

Semester End

Examination

End of

every

semester

Consisting

of Part-A

and Part-B

100

Answer

Scripts

20

%

Semester End

Laboratory

End of

every

semester

laboratory

50

Ind

irec

t A

ssess

men

t

met

hod

s

Course End Survey Student

s

End of

course

Questionnair

e

Based on

COs

10%

Note: Individual faculty may adopt various methods for conducting effective quizzes

and evaluate the same. The frequency of quizzes may be more than three also.

CO-PO Mapping

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 L --- --- --- --- --- H --- M --- --- ---

CO2 M H H M L --- H H M --- M L

CO3 --- H L H --- M H H M --- L M

CO4 L --- M L H --- M --- M --- --- M

Low-1Medium-2 High-3

Page 24: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

24

Semester: III

Course Title: ANALOG ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS

Course Code: 16TE33 CIE Marks: 100+50=150

Hrs/Week: L:T:P:S: 3:0:2:4 SEE Marks: 100+50=150

Credits: 05 SEE Duration: 3Hrs + 3Hrs

Course Learning Objectives: The students will be able to

1 Design and characterize differential amplifiers using BJT and MOSFET

2 Study different parameters and basic circuits of op-amps

3 Design signal generation and wave shaping circuits using op- Amp

4 Design active filters using Op-amp.

5 Design analog circuits using IC 555 and IC565

6 Realize voltage regulators using IC`s

7 Realize basic ADC and DAC circuits.

UNIT-I

Differential amplifiers:

Review of BJT, JFET and MOSFET with their characteristics and equivalent

circuits. Internal structure of differential amplifiers using MOSFET and BJT with

and without active loads.

Characteristics of Practical Op-Amp:

Introduction to Op-amps, Equivalent circuit and symbol of op-amp. Internal

structure of Op-amp and its stages. Parameters of Practical Op-amps. Op-amp

parameters like Input resistance, output resistance, input capacitance, Common

mode rejection ratio, input voltage limits and output voltage limits, Parameters

like Large signal voltage gain, rise time, open loop voltage gain and bandwidth.

Effects of slew rate, input offset voltage, input biasing current, input offset

current, power supply rejection ratio, Thermal drift and offset voltage adjustment.

08 Hrs

UNIT-II

Basic Op-Amp circuits:

Analysis of ideal Op-Amp circuits, non inverting amplifier, inverting amplifier,

Integrator and differentiator.

Circuits with OP-AMPS and Diodes:

Positive signal detectors, precision peak voltage detectors ,precision Half-wave

rectifiers, Precision Full-wave rectifiers, Precision clamping circuits and fixed

voltage limiters, adjustable voltage limiters, comparators, Threshold comparators,

Inverting and Non-inverting Schmitt trigger, Schmitt trigger with reference

voltage, effects on hysteresis on the output voltage.

Wave from generator:

Square wave generator, Triangular wave generator and saw tooth-wave generator

08 Hrs

UNIT-III

Active Filters

Comparison of Active and Passive filters. Butterworth filters( Butterworth

function for n=2 and n=3) ,First order low and high pass filter, Second order Low

and high pass filters, Butterworth second order low pass filters. Band pass filter

(wide-band and narrow band) , Band reject filters (wide-band and narrow

band)and All-pass filter.

Voltage regulator: Basic characteristics, Positive low voltage (2v to 7v)

regulator, High voltage regulator, current limiting and current fold back, current

08 Hrs

Page 25: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

25

boosting and negative voltage regulator. Fixed voltage regulator , Adjustable

positive voltage regulator.

UNIT-IV

Power Amplifier using Transistors and Op-Amps:

Classification of power amplifier, class A Amplifier, Class B push-pull

Amplifiers, complementary Class AB push-pull Amplifier, Quasi-complementary

push-pull amplifier and Transformer coupled Class AB push pull Amplifier,

Power amplifier IC LM 580, LM 384.

08 Hrs

UNIT-V

Analog system design using Linear IC’s:

Voltage Controlled Oscillator NE/SE566and its applications, 555Timer IC-

Functional block diagram and its applications, Phase locked loops and

Applications of IC 565. Sample and Hold circuit, Digital to Analog

converter,Analog to Digital Converter.

08 Hrs

Laboratory Experiments

1. Design of inverting amplifier, non inverting amplifier, integrator using IC 741

2. Design and implementation of half wave and full wave Precision Rectifiers using

operational amplifier IC741

3. Design and implementation of peak detector, clamping circuit & Schmitt trigger circuit.

4. Design and implementation square and ramp wave generators using operational amplifier

IC 741.

5. Design and implement First order High pass filter, Low pass filter, Wide Band Pass

filter and Wide Band reject filter

6. Design and implement Astable multivibrator & Monostable multivibrator using NE555

timer.

7. Realize 2 bit flash ADC using LM 324 comparator and priority encoder using IC 74148

8. Realize a 4 bit DAC using R-2R ladder network and asynchronous decade counter IC

7490.

9. Design and implementation of Class A Amplifiers & Class AB Push- Pull Amplifiers.

10. a. Design and implement VCO using IC NE/SE 566

b. Design and implement PLL using IC NE/SE 565

c. Design and implementation of voltage regulator using IC 723

11. Design of analog circuits using PSPICE

a. Schmitt trigger circuit for given UTP & LTP

b. First order High pass filter, Low pass filter, Wide Band Pass filter and Wide Band

reject filter.

c. Ramp wave form generation using NE555 timer.

d. Class AB Push- Pull Amplifiers

Course Outcomes: After completing the course, the students will be able to

1 Understand the various parameters, characteristics and specifications of devices,

amplifier, data converters and timers

2 Analyze the performance of subsystems

3 Design electronic subsystems for various applications

4 Implement and demonstrate various analog electronic circuits

Reference Books

1. M.H Rashid “Microelectronics circuits Analysis and Design”, Thomson, ISBN: 0-

534-95174-0.

Page 26: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

26

2. Millman & Grabel: “Microelectronics”, TMH 2nd Edition, ISBN: 9780074637364.

3. Sedra & Smith “Microelectronics circuits”, Oxford 5th edition, ISBN: 978-

0195338836.

In case of a course having both Theory & Lab, the following minimum guidelines may

be followed

Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE)

( Theory – 100 Marks) (Laboratory- 50 Marks) Total

(150) Evaluation method Course with Self-

study (EL)

Quiz -1 10 Performance of the student in

the laboratory, every week 40

150

Test -1 25

Quiz -2 10

Quiz -3 10 Test at the end of the semester 10

Test -2 25

Self-study (EL) 20

Total

50 Total 100

Semester End Evaluation (SEE)

Theory (100 Marks) Laboratory(50 Marks) Total

(150)

Part- –A

Objective type questions

20 Experiment

Conduction with

proper results

40

150

Part –B

There should be five questions from five units.

Each question should be for maximum of 16

Marks.

The UNIT-1, UNIT-4 and UNIT-5 should not

have any choice.

The UNIT-2 and UNIT-3 should have an internal

choice.

Both the questions should be of the same

complexity in terms of COs and Bloom’s

taxonomy level.

80

Viva 10

Total

50 Total 100

Page 27: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

27

What To

whom

Frequency

of

conductio

n

Max

Mark

s

Evidence Contribution to

Course Outcome

Dir

ect

Ass

essm

ent

Met

hod

s CIE

Quiz

Student

s

Three 30 Answer

Scripts 80

%

100

%

90

%

Test Two 60/50

Assignment/Self

-study 2 phases 10/20

Reports /

Record

Books Laboratory Weekly 50

SE

E

Semester End

Examination

End of

every

semester

Consisting

of Part-A

and Part-B

100

Answer

Scripts

20

%

Semester End

Laboratory

End of

every

semester

laboratory

50

Ind

irec

t A

ssess

men

t

met

hod

s

Course End Survey Student

s

End of

course

Questionnair

e

Based on

COs

10%

Note: Individual faculty may adopt various methods for conducting effective quizzes

and evaluate the same. The frequency of quizzes may be more than three also.

CO-PO Mapping

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 H H H M L L --- --- H --- --- ---

CO2 H H H L L --- --- --- H --- M L

CO3 H H H M L L --- --- H --- M ---

CO4 H H H M L L --- M H --- M L

Low-1Medium-2 High-3

Page 28: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

28

Semester: III

Course Title: DIGITAL LOGIC DESIGN

Course Code: 16TE34 CIE Marks: 100+50=150

Hrs/Week: L:T:P:S: 3:0:2:4 SEE Marks: 100+50=150

Credits: 05 SEE Duration: 3Hrs+3Hrs

Course Learning Objectives: The students will be able to

1 Optimize logic expressions using Karnaugh map and Tabular method

2 Simplify Boolean equation and design combinational circuits with optimal gates.

3 Analyze the working principles of Flip-Flops and design asynchronous sequential

circuits

4 Design simple synchronous digital circuits based on finite state machine algorithm

5 Design, simulate and implement digital systems using HDL

UNIT-I

Simplification of Boolean Expressions:

Formulation of the Simplification Problem, Prime Implicants and Irredundant

Disjunctive Expressions, Prime Implicates and Irredundant Conjunctive

Expressions, Karnaughs Map- Using Karnaugh Maps to obtain minimal

Expressions for Complete Boolean functions, Minimal Expressions of Incomplete

Boolean Expressions, The Quine MC-Cluskey Method of Generating Prime

implicants and Prime implicates, Prime-Implicant / Prime-Implicate Tables and

Irredundant expressions, VEM Technique (up to 4 variables).

08 Hrs

UNIT-II

Logic Design with MSI Components and Programmable Logic Devices

(PLD’s): Binary Adders and Substractors, Decimal Adders. Comparators,

Decoders, Encoders, Parity Generators and Parity Checking Circuits,

Multiplexers, Demultiplexers, Programmable Logic Devices, Programmable

Read-only memories, Programmable Logic Arrays, Programmable Array Logic.

08 Hrs

UNIT-III

Sequential Logic Circuits:

Bistable Elements, Latches, Timing Considerations, Master-Slave Flip-Flops,

Edge–Triggerred Flip-Flops, Characteristics Equations, Counters, Design of

Synchronous and asynchronous Counters, Shift Registers.

08 Hrs

UNIT-IV

Synchronous Sequential Networks:

Structure and operation of Clocked synchronous Sequential Networks, Analysis of

Clocked Synchronous Sequential Networks, Modeling clocked synchronous

sequential network behavior, State Table Deduction, State Assignment,

Completing the design of clocked synchronous sequential networks

08 Hrs

UNIT-V

Synchronous Sequential Networks:

Structure and operation of Clocked synchronous Sequential Networks, Analysis of

Clocked Synchronous Sequential Networks, Modeling clocked synchronous

sequential network behavior, State Table Deduction, Completing the design of

clocked synchronous sequential networks

08 Hrs

Laboratory Experiments

PART A

Page 29: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

29

1. Realization of combinational circuits using basic gates and ICs.

2. Realization of sequential circuits using universal gates and ICs.

3. To study the working of arithmetic logic unit using IC 74181.

PART B

Design a Verilog module to simulate combination and sequential digital circuits.

Course Outcomes: After completing the course, the students will be able to

1 Simplify Boolean expressions and implement optimal Logic circuits

2 Design and implement combinational and sequential digital systems

3 Design and implement synchronous digital systems using state machines

4 Modeling the digital circuits using HDL

Reference Books

1. Donald D.Givone, “Digital Principles and Design”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2002,ISBN 0-

07-052906

2. Samir Palnitkar “Verilog HDL A guide to digital design and synthesis” Pearson

Education Asia, 2nd Edition, ISBN : 81-7758-918-0.

3. Stephen Brown, “Fundamentals of Digital Logic Design with verilog”, Tata McGraw

Hill, 2nd Edition, 2008. ISBN: 00-70-667241

4. M Morris Mano, Michael D.Ciletti, “Digital Design”, Pearson, 4th Edition, ISBN-978-

81-317-1450-8.

In case of a course having both Theory & Lab, the following minimum guidelines may

be followed

Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE)

( Theory – 100 Marks) (Laboratory- 50 Marks) Total

(150) Evaluation method Course with Self-

study (EL)

Quiz -1 10 Performance of the student in

the laboratory, every week 40

150

Test -1 25

Quiz -2 10

Quiz -3 10 Test at the end of the semester 10

Test -2 25

Self-study (EL) 20

Total

50 Total 100

Semester End Evaluation (SEE)

Theory (100 Marks) Laboratory(50 Marks) Total

(150)

Part- –A

Objective type questions

20 Experiment

Conduction with

proper results

40

Part –B

There should be five questions from five units.

Each question should be for maximum of 16

Marks.

Viva 10

Page 30: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

30

The UNIT-1, UNIT-4 and UNIT-5 should not

have any choice.

The UNIT-2 and UNIT-3 should have an internal

choice.

Both the questions should be of the same

complexity in terms of COs and Bloom’s

taxonomy level.

80

Total

50

150 Total 100

What To

whom

Frequency

of

conductio

n

Max

Mark

s

Evidence Contribution to

Course Outcome

Dir

ect

Ass

essm

ent

Met

hod

s CIE

Quiz

Student

s

Three 30 Answer

Scripts 80

%

100

%

90

%

Test Two 60/50

Assignment/Self

-study 2 phases 10/20

Reports /

Record

Books Laboratory Weekly 50

SE

E

Semester End

Examination

End of

every

semester

Consisting

of Part-A

and Part-B

100

Answer

Scripts

20

%

Semester End

Laboratory

End of

every

semester

laboratory

50

Ind

irec

t A

ssess

men

t

met

hod

s

Course End Survey Student

s

End of

course

Questionnair

e

Based on

COs

10%

Note: Individual faculty may adopt various methods for conducting effective quizzes

and evaluate the same. The frequency of quizzes may be more than three also.

CO-PO Mapping

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 H M M M M --- --- --- L --- --- ---

CO2 H H M M M --- --- --- L --- --- ---

CO3 H H M L M --- --- --- L --- --- ---

CO4 H H H M M --- --- --- L --- --- ---

Low-1Medium-2 High-3

Page 31: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

31

Semester: III

Course Title: NETWORK ANALYSIS

Course Code: 16TE35 CIE Marks: 100

Hrs/Week: L:T:P:S: 3:2:0:4 SEE Marks: 100

Credits: 05 SEE Duration: 3Hrs

Course Learning Objectives: The students will be able to

1 Use mesh and nodal analysis for formulating the transfer function of electrical networks

2 Apply network theorems for reduction.

3 Evaluate the behavior of networks for transient analysis of first order and second order.

4 Analyze and synthesize networks using Laplace transforms.

UNIT-I

Basic Concepts: Basic Electrical Elements, Classification of Network Elements,

Energy and Power in Network elements.

Mesh and Node Analysis: Loop and Node Analysis with Dependent and

Independent Sources for DC and AC Networks including Concepts of Super Mesh

and Super Node.

09 Hrs

UNIT-II

Network Theorems: Principle of Dual Networks, Analysis of Networks using

Superposition, Tellegen’s and Reciprocity Theorem, Thevenin’s & Norton's,

Millman’s & Maximum Power Transfer Theorem.

09 Hrs

UNIT-III

Transient Analysis in Networks: Behavior of R, L, C components under

switching conditions in time domain.(Only initial and final conditions for 2nd

order circuits)

Application Laplace Transforms for transient Analysis: Introduction,

properties (No Derivations), initial & final value theorem, step, ramp and impulse

functions as network sources, Laplace transforms of periodic functions, solution

of a network using Laplace transform.

09 Hrs

UNIT-IV

Two port network Two port networks (z, y, T and h only) parameters, interrelationship between

parameters, cascade connection of two port networks, conditions for symmetry

and reciprocity.

09 Hrs

UNIT-V

Scattering Matrix: Incident and reflected power flow, Scattering matrix for one

port network, Scattering matrix for two port network, Properties of Scattering

matrix & their proof, calculation of network losses.

09 Hrs

Course Outcomes: After completing the course, the students will be able to

1 Distinguish the networks and explain various circuit analysis techniques.

2 Illustrate the usage of network theorems

3 Analyze the circuit parameters during switching in time domain and frequency domain.

4 Evaluate the network parameters and scattering matrix for two port networks.

Reference Books

1. W. H. Hyatt Jr., and J. E. Kemmerly, S. M. Durbin; “Engineering Circuit Analysis”,

Tata McGraw Hill, 2013, 8th Edition.

Page 32: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

32

2. M. E.Van Valkenburg, “Network Analysis”, PHI, 3rd Edition, 2006, ISBN-13: 978-

8131701584.

3. David Pozar, “Microwave Engineering”, Wiley, 4th Edition, 2011, ISBN-13: 978-

0470631553. 4. F. F. Kuo,“Network Analysis and Synthesis”, Wiley, 2nd Edition, Reprint 2006,

ISBN-13: 978-8126510016.

In case of a course having only theory, the following minimum guidelines may be

followed.

Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE)

( Theory – 100 Marks)

Evaluation method Course with Self-study

Quiz -1 10

Test -1 25

Quiz -2 10

Quiz -3 10

Test -2 25

Self-study (EL) 20

Total 100

Semester End Evaluation

Theory (100)

Part- –A

Objective type questions 20

Part –B

There should be five questions from five units. Each question should be for maximum

of 16 Marks.

The UNIT-1, UNIT-4 and UNIT-5 should not have any choice.

The UNIT-2 and UNIT-3 should have an internal choice.

Both the questions should be of the same complexity in terms of COs and Bloom’s

taxonomy level.

80

Total 100

Note: The faculty teaching the course may adapt additional methods for evaluation

within the total maximum marks.

Page 33: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

33

What To

whom

Frequency

of

conductio

n

Max

Mark

s

Evidence Contribution to

Course Outcome

Dir

ect

Ass

essm

ent

Met

hod

s CIE

Quiz

Student

s

Three 30 Answer

Scripts 80

%

100

%

90

%

Test Two 60/50

Assignment/Self

-study 2 phases 10/20

Reports /

Record

Books Laboratory Weekly 50

SE

E

Semester End

Examination

End of

every

semester

Consisting

of Part-A

and Part-B

100

Answer

Scripts

20

%

Semester End

Laboratory

End of

every

semester

laboratory

50

Ind

irec

t A

ssess

men

t

met

hod

s

Course End Survey Student

s

End of

course

Questionnair

e

Based on

COs

10%

Note: Individual faculty may adopt various methods for conducting effective quizzes

and evaluate the same. The frequency of quizzes may be more than three also.

CO-PO Mapping

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 H --- L --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

CO2 H --- L --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

CO3 H M M L M --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

CO4 H M H M M --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

Low-1Medium-2 High-3

Page 34: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

34

Semester: III

Course Title: FIELDS AND WAVES

Course Code: 16TE36 CIE Marks: 100

Hrs/Week: L:T:P:S: 3:2:0:0 SEE Marks: 100

Credits: 04 SEE Duration: 3Hrs

Course Learning Objectives: The students will be able to

1 Apply knowledge of mathematics, to find the force and related electric and Magnetic

field Intensity

2 Evaluate using various postulates static electric field and magnetic field.

3 Appreciate the changes in Maxwell’s equation for time varying fields.

4 Describe the wave equations using Maxwell’s equation.

5 Calculate various parameters in wave equations.

UNIT-I

Electro statics I:

Coulomb’s law, Electric Field Intensity, Applications (field due to Line charge

distribution, Surface charge distribution- sheet, Circular ring and disk), Electric

Flux, density Gauss' Law, Divergence Theorem(qualitative treatment),

Application of Gauss's Law (Field due to Continuous Volume Charge, Line

Charge, Sheet Charge, Metal sphere, spherical shell).

09 Hrs

UNIT-II

Electro statics II:

Electric potential, Relation between E and V, Applications (field and potential

due to Line charge distribution, Surface charge distribution- sheet, Circular ring),

Energy Density in an Electric Field, Illustrative examples. Boundary Conditions

(dielectric-dielectric, dielectric-conductor), Poisson's and Laplace's Equations to

evaluate electric field.

09 Hrs

UNIT-III

Magneto Static Fields:

Current, Current density, Biot -Savart Law , Applications (Infinite linear

conductor, current carrying in loop, solenoid), Magnetic Flux and Flux Density,

Ampere’s Circuital Law, Stoke’s theorem (qualitative treatment), Applications

(Infinite line current, sheet current, coaxial transmission line), Magnetic Potential.

09 Hrs

UNIT-IV

Maxwell's Equations: Introduction, Faraday's Law, Transformer and Motional

EMFs, Displacement Current, Maxwell's Equations in Final Forms, Time-Varying

Potentials, Time-Harmonic Fields.

09 Hrs

UNIT-V

Electromagnetic Waves: Wave equations, Wave Propagation in Lossy Dielectrics, Plane Waves in Lossless

Dielectrics, Plane Waves in Free Space, Plane Waves in Good Conductors, Power

and the Poynting Vector, Reflection of a Plane Wave at Normal Incidence,

Reflection of a Plane Wave at Oblique Incidence.

09 Hrs

Course Outcomes: After completing the course, the students will be able to

1 Apply various mathematical postulates available to calculate electric field.

Page 35: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

35

2 Analyze various mathematical postulates available to calculate Magnetic field.

3 Apply Maxwell’s equations for static and time varying fields.

4 Evaluate a wave equation for UPW & necessary parameters.

Reference Books

1. Matthew N O Sadiku, “Elements of Electromagnetic”, Oxford University Press, 6th

Edition, 2015, ISBN-13: 978-0199461851.

2. William H. Hayt Jr. and John A. Buck ,”Engineering Electromagnetic”, Tata McGraw

Hill, 8th Edition, 2014, ISBN 978-0-07-338066-7.

3. Edward C. Jordan and Keith G. Balmain, “Electromagnetics Waves and Radiating

Systems”, Prentice Hall of India, 2nd Edition, 1968. Reprint 2002, ISBN-

9788120300545.

In case of a course having only theory, the following minimum guidelines may be

followed.

Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE)

( Theory – 100 Marks)

Evaluation method Course with Assignment

Quiz -1 10

Test -1 30

Quiz -2 10

Quiz -3 10

Test -2 30

Assignments 10

Total 100

Semester End Evaluation

Theory (100)

Part- –A

Objective type questions 20

Part –B

There should be five questions from five units. Each question should be for maximum

of 16 Marks.

The UNIT-1, UNIT-4 and UNIT-5 should not have any choice.

The UNIT-2 and UNIT-3 should have an internal choice.

Both the questions should be of the same complexity in terms of COs and Bloom’s

taxonomy level.

80

Total 100

Note: The faculty teaching the course may adapt additional methods for evaluation

within the total maximum marks.

Page 36: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

36

What To

whom

Frequency

of

conductio

n

Max

Mark

s

Evidence Contribution to

Course Outcome

Dir

ect

Ass

essm

ent

Met

hod

s CIE

Quiz

Student

s

Three 30 Answer

Scripts 80

%

100

%

90

%

Test Two 60/50

Assignment/Self

-study 2 phases 10/20

Reports /

Record

Books Laboratory Weekly 50

SE

E

Semester End

Examination

End of

every

semester

Consisting

of Part-A

and Part-B

100

Answer

Scripts

20

%

Semester End

Laboratory

End of

every

semester

laboratory

50

Ind

irec

t A

ssess

men

t

met

hod

s

Course End Survey Student

s

End of

course

Questionnair

e

Based on

COs

10%

Note: Individual faculty may adopt various methods for conducting effective quizzes

and evaluate the same. The frequency of quizzes may be more than three also.

CO-PO Mapping

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 H M --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

CO2 H L --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

CO3 M L L --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

CO4 M M L L L --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

Low-1Medium-2 High-3

Page 37: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

37

Semester: III

Course Title: BRIDGE COURSE MATHEMATICS

Course Code: 16DMA37 CIE Marks: 50

Hrs/Week: L:T:P:S: 2:0:0:0 SEE Marks: 50

Credits: 02 SEE Duration: 1.5Hrs

Course Learning Objectives: The students will be able to

1 Acquire knowledge of multivariate functions, types of derivatives involved with these

functions, Jacobian as transformation factor and applications.

2

Enhance the knowledge level to visualize integrals in higher dimensional geometry,

possible representation and evaluation of geometrical and physical quantities in terms

of multiple integrals.

3 Recognize and model differential equations, apply analytic techniques to compute

solution for engineering problems.

4 Acquire concepts of vector function, vector field, differential calculus of vector

functions in Cartesian coordinates.

5 Finding the approximate solutions using numerical methods, for problems which do not

have analytical solutions.

UNIT-I

DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS

Taylor and Maclaurin’s series for function of single variable.

Introduction-partial derivatives, simple problems. Total derivative, Composite

functions, Jacobians- simple problems.

06 Hrs

UNIT-II

MULTIPLE INTEGRALS

Evaluation of double and triple integrals – direct problems, change of order in

double integral, change of variables to polar, cylindrical and spherical coordinate

systems.

06 Hrs

UNIT-III

DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS

Higher order linear differential equations with constant coefficients,

Complementary function and Particular integral, problems. Equations with

variable coefficients – Cauchy and Legendre differential equations, problems.

06 Hrs

UNIT-IV

VECTOR DIFFERENTIATION

Introduction, simple problems in terms of velocity and acceleration. Concepts of

Gradient, Divergence- solenoidal vector function, Curl- irrotational vector

function and Laplacian, simple problems.

06 Hrs

UNIT-V

NUMERICAL METHODS Algebraic and transcendental equations – Regula-Falsi method, Newton-Raphson

method.

Ordinary Differential Equations – Taylor’s, modified Euler’s and 4th order Runge-

Kutta methods.

Numerical Integration – Simpson’s 1/3rd , 3/8th and Weddle’s rules.

06 Hrs

Course Outcomes: After completing the course, the students will be able to

1 Understand the significance of fundamental concepts of Mathematics in various

Engineering problems

Page 38: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

38

2 Interpret the concept of differentiation, integration and differential equations in

Engineering and real life problems

3 Apply effectively appropriate quantitative tools and logical modes of thinking to analyze

for solving Engineering problems.

4 Justify the application of various Mathematical models and broaden the problem solving

skills in a wide range of intellectual domains.

Reference Books

1. B.S. Grewal; Higher Engineering Mathematics; Khanna Publishers; 40thEdition; 2007;

ISBN: 81-7409-195-5.

2. N.P Bali & Manish Goyal; A Text Book of Engineering Mathematics; Lakshmi

Publications; 7thEdition; 2010; ISBN: 978-81-7008-992-6; Chapters: 6, 18, 16, 8, 26;

3. R.K. Jain & S.R.K. Iyengar; Advanced Engineering Mathematics; Narosa Publishing

House; 2002; 817319-420-3; Chapters: 1, 2, 8, 15;

4. ErwinKreyszig; Advanced Engineering Mathematics; John Wiley & Sons; 9thEdition;

2007; ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6; Chapters: 6, 10, 12;

In case of a course having only theory, the following minimum guidelines may be

followed.

Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE)

( Theory – 50 Marks)

Evaluation method Course with Assignment

Quiz -1 05

Test -1 15

Quiz -2 05

Quiz -3 05

Test -2 15

Assignment 05

Total 50

Semester End Evaluation

Theory (50)

Part- –A

Objective type questions 10

Part –B

There should be five questions from five units. Each question should be for maximum

of 16 Marks.

The UNIT-1, UNIT-4 and UNIT-5 should not have any choice.

The UNIT-2 and UNIT-3 should have an internal choice.

Both the questions should be of the same complexity in terms of COs and Bloom’s

taxonomy level.

40

Total 50

Note: The faculty teaching the course may adapt additional methods for evaluation

within the total maximum marks.

Page 39: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

39

What To

whom

Frequenc

y of

conductio

n

Max

Mark

s

Evidence Contribution to

Course Outcome

Dir

ect

Ass

essm

ent

Met

hod

s

CIE

Quiz

Student

s

Three 30 Answer

Scripts

80

%

100

%

90

%

Test Two 60/50

Assignment/Self

-study 2 phases 10/20 Reports /

Record

Books Laboratory Weekly 50

SE

E

Semester End

Examination

End of

every

semester

Consisting

of Part-A

and Part-B

100

Answer

Scripts

20

%

Semester End

Laboratory

End of

every

semester

laboratory

50

Ind

irec

t A

sses

smen

t

met

hod

s

Course End Survey Student

s

End of

course

Questionnair

e

Based on

COs

10%

Note: Individual faculty may adopt various methods for conducting effective quizzes

and evaluate the same. The frequency of quizzes may be more than three also.

CO-PO Mapping

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 H M --- --- --- --- --- --- --- L --- L

CO2 H M M L --- --- --- --- --- L --- L

CO3 H H M M M --- --- --- --- L --- L

CO4 H H H H M --- --- --- --- L --- L

Low-1Medium-2 High-3

Page 40: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

40

Semester: III

Course Title: BRIDGE COURSE C PROGRAMMING

Course Code: 16DCS37 CIE Marks: 50

Hrs/Week: L:T:P:S: 2:0:0:0 SEE Marks: 50

Credits: 02 SEE Duration: 1.5Hrs

Course Learning Objectives: The students will be able to

1 Develop arithmetic reasoning and analytical skills to apply knowledge of basic concepts

of programming in C.

2 Learn basic principles of problem solving through programming.

3 Write C programs using appropriate programming constructs adopted in programming.

4 Solve complex problems using C programming.

UNIT-I

Introduction to Reasoning, Algorithms and Flowcharts

Skill development – Examples related to Arithmetical Reasoning and Analytical

Reasoning. Fundamentals of algorithms and flowcharts.

Introduction to C programming

Basic structure of C program, Features of C language, Character set, C tokens,

Keywords and Identifiers, Constants, Variables, Data types.

Handling Input and Output operations

Reading a character, Writing a character, Formatted input/output functions,

Unformatted input/output functions.

05 Hrs

UNIT-II

Operators and Expressions Arithmetic operators, Relational operators, Logical Operators, Assignment

operators, Increment and decrement operators, Conditional operators, Bit-wise

operators, Arithmetic expressions, evaluation of expressions, Precedence of

arithmetic operators, Type conversion in expressions, Operator precedence and

associativity.

Programming Constructs

Decision Making and Branching Decision making with ‘if’ statement, Simple ‘if’ statement, the ‘if…else’

statement, nesting of ‘if…else’ statements, The ‘else if’ ladder, The ‘switch’

statement, The ‘?:’ operator, The ‘goto’ statement.

Decision making and looping The while statement, the do statement, The ‘for’

statement, Jumps in loops.

05 Hrs

UNIT-III

Arrays

One dimensional arrays, Declaration of one dimensional arrays. Initialization of

one dimensional arrays, Two dimensional arrays, Initializing two dimensional

arrays.

Character Arrays and Strings

Declaring and Initializing String Variables, Reading Strings from Terminal,

Writing strings to screen, Arithmetic Operations on characters, String operations

using with and without String handling functions.

04 Hrs

UNIT-IV

User-defined functions 06 Hrs

Page 41: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

41

Need for User Defined Functions, Definition of functions, Return values and their

types, Function calls, Function declaration, Category of functions, Nesting of

functions, Functions with arrays, Storage classes.

Structures and Unions

Introduction, Structure definition, Declaring structure variables, Accessing

structure members, Structure initialization, Copying and comparing structure

variables, Arrays of structure, Arrays within structures, Structures and functions,

Unions.

UNIT-V

Pointers

Introduction , Accessing the address of a variable, Declaring and initializing of

pointer variables, Accessing a variable using pointers, Chain of pointers, Pointer

expressions, Pointer increments and scale factor, Pointers and arrays, Pointers and

character strings.

File Managements in C

Basic concepts of files, Defining and opening a file, closing of a file, Input/Output

operations on files.

04 Hrs

Course Outcomes: After completing the course, the students will be able to

1 Understand and explore the fundamental computer concepts and basic programming

principles like data types, input/output functions, operators, programming constructs and

user defined functions.

2 Analyze and Develop algorithmic solutions to problems

3 Implement and Demonstrate capabilities of writing ‘C’ programs in optimized, robust

and reusable code.

4 Apply appropriate concepts of data structures like arrays, structures, and files to

implement programs for various applications.

Reference Books

1. P. Dey, M. Ghosh, “Programming in C”, Oxford University press, First Edition, 2007,

ISBN (13): 9780195687910.

2. Kernighan B.W and Dennis M. Ritchie, “The C Programming Language”, Second

Edition, Prentice Hall, 2005, ISBN (13): 9780131101630.

3. H. Schildt, Turbo C: The Complete Reference, Mcgraw Hill Education, 4th Edition,

2000, ISBN-13: 9780070411838.

4. Yashavant P. Kanetkar, “Understanding Pointers in C”, BPB publications, 3rd edition,

ISBN-13: 978-8176563581.

In case of a course having only theory, the following minimum guidelines may be

followed.

Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE)

( Theory –50 Marks)

Evaluation method Course with Assignment

Quiz -1 05

Test -1 15

Quiz -2 05

Quiz -3 05

Page 42: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

42

Test -2 15

Assignment 05

Total 50

Semester End Evaluation

Theory (50)

Part- –A

Objective type questions 10

Part –B

There should be five questions from five units. Each question should be for maximum

of 16 Marks.

The UNIT-1, UNIT-4 and UNIT-5 should not have any choice.

The UNIT-2 and UNIT-3 should have an internal choice.

Both the questions should be of the same complexity in terms of COs and Bloom’s

taxonomy level.

40

Total 50

Note: The faculty teaching the course may adapt additional methods for evaluation

within the total maximum marks.

What To

whom

Frequency

of

conductio

n

Max

Mark

s

Evidence Contribution to

Course Outcome

Dir

ect

Ass

essm

ent

Met

hod

s CIE

Quiz

Student

s

Three 30 Answer

Scripts 80

%

100

%

90

%

Test Two 60/50

Assignment/Self

-study 2 phases 10/20

Reports /

Record

Books Laboratory Weekly 50

SE

E

Semester End

Examination

End of

every

semester

Consisting

of Part-A

and Part-B

100

Answer

Scripts

20

%

Semester End

Laboratory

End of

every

semester

laboratory

50

Ind

irec

t A

ssess

men

t

met

ho

ds

Course End Survey Student

s

End of

course

Questionnair

e

Based on

COs

10%

Page 43: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

43

Note: Individual faculty may adopt various methods for conducting effective quizzes

and evaluate the same. The frequency of quizzes may be more than three also.

CO-PO Mapping

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 H L H L H --- --- M L --- --- L

CO2 H H H L H --- --- M L --- --- L

CO3 H H M L H --- --- M L --- --- M

CO4 H H H H H --- --- M L --- --- H

Low-1Medium-2 High-3

Page 44: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

44

Semester: IV

Course Title: LINEAR ALGEBRA & PROBABILITY THEROY

(COMMON TO ECE, TC, EI)

Course Code: 16MA41B CIE Marks: 100

Hrs/Week: L:T:P:S: 3:2:0:0 SEE Marks: 100

Credits: 04 SEE Duration: 3Hrs

Course Learning Objectives: The students will be able to

1 Understand the basics of matrix theory, Eigen values, Eigen vectors, its applications for

finding the solution of system of linear equations.

2 View the concepts of vector spaces, linear transformation and orthogonality of matrices.

3 Apply the knowledge of the theory of probability in the study of uncertainties.

4 Use probability and sampling theory to solve random physical phenomena and

implement proper distribution models.

UNIT-I

LINEAR ALGEBRA - I Elementary transformations, Rank of matrix using Echelon form, geometry and

consistency of system of linear equations, solution of system of linear equations

using Gauss elimination method, Eigen values and Eigen vectors.

08 Hrs

UNIT-II

LINEAR ALGEBRA - II Basic definition of Groups, Rings, Fields, Vector spaces, subspaces, Linear

independence, Basis and Dimension, Linear transformation, matrix representation,

Kernel and image of a linear transformation, Rank- Nullity theorem.

08 Hrs

UNIT-III

LINEAR ALGEBRA - III Orthogonal Vectors , Orthogonal Projections, Orthogonal and orthonrmal Bases,

Orthogonal and Orthonormal Matrices, Gram-Schmidt Orthogonalization, QR

Factorizations, Least Square Problems, Diagonalization of a Matrix, Singular

Value Decomposition.

08 Hrs

UNIT-IV

PROBABILITY

Baye’s rule, Random Variables: Discrete and continuous, probability mass

function, probability density function, cumulative density function, mean,

variance, standard deviation-problems. Joint probability distributive function-

Discrete and continuous, mean, covariance and correlation.

08 Hrs

UNIT-V

PROBABILITY DISTRIBUTIONS Some standard discrete and continuous Distribution- Binomial, Poisson, Normal,

Exponential and Geometric distributions. Sampling Theory: Sampling, sampling

distributions, standard errors, student’s t-distribution, chi-square distribution as a

test of goodness of fit.

08 Hrs

Course Outcomes: After completing the course, the students will be able to

1 Understand the fundamental concepts of Linear Algebra and Probability theory.

2 Demonstrate the properties of Eigen values and Eigen vectors, linear dependency of

vectors, orthogonality of vectors and matrices, random variables to describe probability

Page 45: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

45

functions

3 Apply matrix theory to solve system of linear equations, linear transformations,

orthogonality and probability & distribution to nondeterministic situations

4 Estimate and interpret Rank-Nullity, Diagonalisation, SVD, central tendency and

sampling theory occurring in engineering problems.

Text Books

1. Gilbert Strang, Linear Algebra and Its Applications, Cengage Learning India Edition,

4th Edition, 2006, ISBN: 81-315-0172-8.

2. B.S. Grewal; Higher Engineering Mathematics; Khanna Publishers; 40th Edition;

2007; ISBN: 81-7409-195-5.

Reference Books

1. S. Lipschutz and M. L. Lipson, Schaum's Outline of Linear Algebra, McGraw-Hill, 5th

Edition, ISBN: 978-0-07-179456-5.

2. Seymour Lipschutz & Marc Lars Lipson- “Theory and Problems of Probability”,

Schaum’s Outline Series, 2nd Edition, ISBN: 0-07-118356-6.

In case of a course having only theory, the following minimum guidelines may be

followed.

Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE)

( Theory – 100 Marks)

Evaluation method Course with Assignment

Quiz -1 10

Test -1 30

Quiz -2 10

Quiz -3 10

Test -2 30

Assignment 10

Total 100

Semester End Evaluation

Theory (100)

Part- –A

Objective type questions 20

Part –B

There should be five questions from five units. Each question should be for maximum

of 16 Marks.

The UNIT-1, UNIT-4 and UNIT-5 should not have any choice.

The UNIT-2 and UNIT-3 should have an internal choice.

Both the questions should be of the same complexity in terms of COs and Bloom’s

taxonomy level.

80

Total 100

Page 46: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

46

Note: The faculty teaching the course may adapt additional methods for evaluation

within the total maximum marks.

What To

whom

Frequency

of

conductio

n

Max

Mark

s

Evidence Contribution to

Course Outcome

Dir

ect

Ass

essm

ent

Met

hod

s CIE

Quiz

Student

s

Three 30 Answer

Scripts 80

%

100

%

90

%

Test Two 60/50

Assignment/Self

-study 2 phases 10/20

Reports /

Record

Books Laboratory Weekly 50

SE

E

Semester End

Examination

End of

every

semester

Consisting

of Part-A

and Part-B

100

Answer

Scripts

20

%

Semester End

Laboratory

End of

every

semester

laboratory

50

Ind

irec

t A

ssess

men

t

met

hod

s

Course End Survey Student

s

End of

course

Questionnair

e

Based on

COs

10%

Note: Individual faculty may adopt various methods for conducting effective quizzes

and evaluate the same. The frequency of quizzes may be more than three also.

CO-PO Mapping

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 H M --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- L

CO2 H M --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- L

CO3 L M M --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- L

CO4 --- L L H --- --- --- --- --- --- --- L

Low-1Medium-2 High-3

Page 47: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

47

ENGINEERING MATERIALS

Course Code: : 16EC32/42 CIE Marks: 50

Hrs/Week: L:T:P:S : : 2:0:0:0 SEE Marks: 50

Credits: 02 SEE Duration: 1.5 Hrs

Course Learning Objectives (CLOs):

The student will be able to

1. Understand electrical conduction (transport) in solids based on quantum mechanics and

modern band theory,

2. Understand lattice vibration and thermal conduction (transport) in solids

3. Understand major properties of bulk and nanostructured semiconductors

4. Understand effects of dopant impurities and defects in semiconductors

5. Understand the principles of light-solid interactions.

UNIT – I 12 Hrs

Introduction :Classification and Properties of Materials, Materials Used in

Electrical and Electronic Industries, Requirements and Future Developments of

Electronic Materials Classical Theory of Electrical Conduction and Conducting

Materials:Resistivity, TCR (Temperature Coefficient of Resistivity) and

Matthiessen’s Rule, Traditional Classification of Metals, Insulators and

Semiconductors, Drude’s Free Electron Theory, Hall Effect, Wiedemann–Franz

Law, Resistivity of Alloys, Nordheim’s Rule, Resistivity of Alloys and Multiphase

Solids ,Materials for Electricity Transmission:Thin Film Electronic Materials

Techniques for Preparation of Thin Films, Thin Film Conducting Materials, Thin

Film Resistors, Transparent and Conductive Thin Films, Thin Film Magnetic

Materials

UNIT – II 12 Hrs

Organic Electronic Materials Conducting Polymers, Semiconducting Organic

Materials, Organic Superconductors, Organic Piezoelectric Materials:

Nanomaterials for Electronic Device Applications Techniques for Preparation of

Nanomaterials, Micro-/nano-devices Using Nanostructured Materials, graphene,

carbon nano tubes.

Expected Course Outcomes:

After going through this course the student will be able to:

CO1: Apply general math, science and engineering skills to the solution of

engineering problems.

CO2: Analyze of the social, safety and environmental consequences of their

work, and be able to engage in public debate regarding these issues.

CO3: Apply core concepts in Materials Science to solve engineering problems.

CO4: Understand & Apply the contemporary issues relevant to Materials Science

and Engineering

Reference Books:

1. Wei Gao & Zhengwei Li, Nigel Sammes ,”Introduction to Electronic Materials for

Engineers” ,2nd Edition, World Scientific Publishing Co. Pvt. Ltd,

ISBN:9789814293693

Page 48: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

48

In case of a course having only theory, the following minimum guidelines may be

followed.

Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE)

( Theory –50 Marks)

Evaluation method Course with Assignment

Quiz -1 05

Test -1 15

Quiz -2 05

Quiz -3 05

Test -2 15

Assignment 05

Total 50

Semester End Evaluation

Theory (100)

Part- –A

Objective type questions 10

Part –B

There should be five questions from five units. Each question should be for maximum

of 16 Marks.

The UNIT-1, UNIT-4 and UNIT-5 should not have any choice.

The UNIT-2 and UNIT-3 should have an internal choice.

Both the questions should be of the same complexity in terms of COs and Bloom’s

taxonomy level.

40

Total 50

Note: The faculty teaching the course may adapt additional methods for evaluation

within the total maximum marks.

Page 49: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

49

What To

whom

Frequency

of

conductio

n

Max

Mark

s

Evidence Contribution to

Course Outcome

Dir

ect

Ass

essm

ent

Met

hod

s CIE

Quiz

Student

s

Three 30 Answer

Scripts 80

%

100

%

90

%

Test Two 60/50

Assignment/Self

-study 2 phases 10/20

Reports /

Record

Books Laboratory Weekly 50

SE

E

Semester End

Examination

End of

every

semester

Consisting

of Part-A

and Part-B

100

Answer

Scripts

20

%

Semester End

Laboratory

End of

every

semester

laboratory

50

Ind

irec

t A

ssess

men

t

met

hod

s

Course End Survey Student

s

End of

course

Questionnair

e

Based on

COs

10%

Note: Individual faculty may adopt various methods for conducting effective quizzes

and evaluate the same. The frequency of quizzes may be more than three also.

CO-PO Mapping

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 H --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

CO2 --- M --- --- --- --- L H M --- --- ---

CO3 --- --- H --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

CO4 --- --- --- --- --- --- H L --- --- H

Low-1Medium-2 High-3

Page 50: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

50

Semester: IV

Course Title: ANALOG COMMUNICATION

Course Code: 16TE43 CIE Marks: 100+50=150

Hrs/Week: L:T:P:S: 3:0:2:4 SEE Marks: 100+50=150

Credits: 05 SEE Duration: 3Hrs+3Hrs

Course Learning Objectives: The students will be able to

1 Understand the functioning of a Communication system.

2 Analyze various analog modulation and demodulation schemes with its performance

parameters.

3 Classify different types of noise and its effect on communication systems.

4 Describe the working of the radio communication systems and Pulse modulation

techniques

5 Design and build the analog modulation and demodulation circuits for different

applications

UNIT-I

Introduction:

Elements of Communication systems, Transmission of Message signals,

Limitations & Resources of Communication systems.

Filtering & Signal Distortion: Linear Distortion & Equalization, Ideal Low-pass filters, Band pass transmission,

Phase delay and Group delay.

Amplitude Modulation: Time domain and frequency domain descriptions, AM

generation and AM detection. Envelope detector.

08 Hrs

UNIT-II

Suppressed Carrier Modulation Techniques: DSBSC: Time domain and frequency domain descriptions, generation, coherent

detection, Costas loop. Quadrature Carrier multiplexing;

SSBSC: Time domain and frequency domain descriptions, generation – Filtering

method, Phase discrimination method. Coherent detection.

VSB: Generation and Detection. Comparison of AM techniques; Frequency

Translation, Frequency Division Multiplexing, AM Radio.

08 Hrs

UNIT-III

Angle Modulation Techniques:

Basic concepts, Phase Modulation, Frequency Modulation – Direct and Indirect

methods, Armstrong method. FM-Demodulation using PLL, Limiting of FM

waves.

Applications: FM Radio, FM Stereo Multiplexing.

08 Hrs

UNIT-IV

System Noise: Introduction, Shot noise, Resistor noise, white noise; Spectral characteristics of

Random signals and noise, Noise-equivalent Bandwidth; Noise figure and Noise

temperature, cascade stages.

Noise in Analog Modulation: Signal-to-Noise ratio, AM Receiver Model, SNR for Coherent reception, Noise in

AM receivers, AM Threshold, FM receiver model, Noise in FM Reception, FM

Threshold Effect, Pre-emphasis and De-emphasis in FM.

08 Hrs

UNIT-V

Digital Coding of Analog Waveforms: 08 Hrs

Page 51: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

51

Sampling, Sampling Theorem, Pulse Modulation, Quantization, Coding and

Regeneration, Pulse code Modulation, DPCM, Delta modulation; Time division

multiplexing, T-1 system.

Laboratory Experiments

I. The following experiments to be Conducted using hardware.

1. Design and conduct an experiment of Amplitude modulator and demodulator circuit.

2. Design and conduct an experiment of Frequency modulator and demodulator circuit.

3. Design and conduct an experiment for generation of DSBSC waveform using Ring

Modulator.

4. Design and conduct an experiment for PAM generation & demodulation.

5. Design and conduct a suitable circuit for Pre-emphasis and De-emphasis.

6. Conduct an experiment to verify the sampling theorem.

II. The following experiments to be demonstrated using Virtual Instrumentation (NI

Lab view).

1. Design and Simulate AM & DSBSC modulator and demodulator circuits.

2. Design and Simulate SSBSC & VSB modulator and demodulator circuits.

3. Design and Simulate Pulse amplitude modulator and demodulator circuits.

4. Design and Simulate Low pass & High pass filters and plot its frequency responses.

5. Design and Simulate Band pass & Band elimination filters and plot its frequency

responses.

6. Design and Simulate Frequency modulator & demodulator circuits.

Course Outcomes: After completing the course, the students will be able to

1 Explain the fundamental concepts and applications of analog communication.

2 Analyze the behavior of communication systems without and with noise.

3 Design various modulation and demodulation circuits.

4 Implement, demonstrate and Evaluate the performance parameters of different analog

Communication circuits

Reference Books

1. Simon Haykin, “An Introduction to Analog & Digital Communications”, John Wiley,

2nd Edition, 2002. ISBN: 9788126536535.

2. Simon Haykin, “Communication Systems”, John Wiley, 4th Edition, 2001, ISBN:

0471178691 / 9780471178699

3. H.P. Hsu, “Analog and Digital Communications”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2nd Edition,

2006. ISBN: 0071402284 / 9780071402286

Page 52: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

52

In case of a course having both Theory & Lab, the following minimum guidelines may

be followed

Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE)

( Theory – 100 Marks) (Laboratory- 50 Marks) Total

(150) Evaluation method Course with Self

Study

Quiz -1 10 Performance of the student in

the laboratory, every week 40

150

Test -1 25

Quiz -2 10

Quiz -3 10 Test at the end of the semester 10

Test -2 25

Self Study 20

Total

50 Total 100

Semester End Evaluation (SEE)

Theory (100 Marks) Laboratory(50 Marks) Total

(150)

Part- –A

Objective type questions

20 Experiment

Conduction with

proper results

40

150

Part –B

There should be five questions from five units.

Each question should be for maximum of 16

Marks.

The UNIT-1, UNIT-4 and UNIT-5 should not

have any choice.

The UNIT-2 and UNIT-3 should have an internal

choice.

Both the questions should be of the same

complexity in terms of COs and Bloom’s

taxonomy level.

80

Viva 10

Total

50 Total 100

Page 53: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

53

What To

whom

Frequency

of

conductio

n

Max

Mark

s

Evidence Contribution to

Course Outcome

Dir

ect

Ass

essm

ent

Met

hod

s CIE

Quiz

Student

s

Three 30 Answer

Scripts 80

%

100

%

90

%

Test Two 60/50

Assignment/Self

-study 2 phases 10/20

Reports /

Record

Books Laboratory Weekly 50

SE

E

Semester End

Examination

End of

every

semester

Consisting

of Part-A

and Part-B

100

Answer

Scripts

20

%

Semester End

Laboratory

End of

every

semester

laboratory

50

Ind

irec

t A

ssess

men

t

met

hod

s

Course End Survey Student

s

End of

course

Questionnair

e

Based on

COs

10%

Note: Individual faculty may adopt various methods for conducting effective quizzes

and evaluate the same. The frequency of quizzes may be more than three also.

CO-PO Mapping

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 M M L --- M --- --- --- --- --- --- L

CO2 M M L L M --- --- --- --- --- --- L

CO3 M H H M M --- --- --- --- --- --- L

CO4 M H H M M --- --- --- --- --- --- L

Low-1Medium-2 High-3

Page 54: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

54

Semester: IV

Course Title: SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS

Course Code: 16TE44 CIE Marks: 100

Hrs/Week: L:T:P:S: 3:2:0:0 SEE Marks: 100

Credits: 04 SEE Duration: 3Hrs

Course Learning Objectives: The students will be able to

1 Analyze and recognize basic signals and its operations in electrical and

communications.

2 Apply mathematical transforms to study the behavior of various systems.

3 Develop systems with the knowledge of difference and differential equations and their

responses.

4 Design a system and its characterization.

UNIT-I

Signals:

Definition of Signals, Classification of Signals, Basic Operations on Signals:

Operations Performed on the independent and dependent variable, Precedence

rule, Elementary Signals.

Systems:

Definition of systems, system viewed as interconnection of operations, properties

of systems.

08 Hrs

UNIT II

Linear Time Invariant Systems:

Discrete Time Systems: Convolution sum, Convolution sum evaluation

procedure.

Continuous Time Systems: Convolution integrals, convolution integrals evaluation procedure,

interconnections of LTI system, relations between LTI system properties and

impulse response representation, difference equation representation of LTI system

and solving difference equation & differential equation, block diagram

representation of systems.

08 Hrs

UNIT-III

Fourier Representation of Discrete-Time signals: Discrete Time Fourier series (DTFS): Computation of DTFS and Inverse DTFS,

Properties.

Discrete time Fourier transform (DTFT): Computation, Properties of DTFT,

Inverse DTFT.

08 Hrs

UNIT-IV

Applications of Fourier representations for Continuous-time and Discrete-

time Systems: Fourier Transform representations of continuous-time/discrete-

time Periodic Signals, Frequency response of Systems characterized by LCC

differential/difference equation. Convolution and Multiplication with mixtures of

periodic and Non-periodic Signals.

Sampling: Sampling Continuous-Time Signals, Reconstruction of Continuous

Time Signals from Samples, Sampling theorem, Ideal Reconstruction and

Practical Reconstruction.

08 Hrs

UNIT-V

Page 55: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

55

Applications of Z Transforms:

Introduction, Z Transforms, Properties of ROC, Poles and Zeros, Relation

between Z Transform and Fourier Transform, Properties of Z- Transforms.

Inverse of Z Transforms: Partial-Fraction Expansions, Power Series Expansion;

Transfer Function, Causality and Stability, System Identification and Inverse

Systems. Unilateral Z transform and its application to solve difference equation.

08 Hrs

Course Outcomes: After completing the course, the students will be able to

1 Explain the representation of signals and systems in various domains.

2 Apply various mathematical operations on signals.

3 Analyze both continuous and discrete time systems in time, frequency domain and z-

domain.

4 Evaluate the characteristics of systems

Reference Books

1. Simon Haykin and Barry Van Veen, “Signals and Systems”, John Wiley & Sons,

2ndEdition, 2008. ISBN: 0471138207.

2. V Oppenheim, Alan Willsky and A Hamid Nawab, “Signals and Systems”, Alan,

Pearson Education Asia/ PHI, 2nd Edition, 2006, ISBN: 9780138147570.

3. H.P Hsu, R. Ranjan, “Signals and Systems”, Schaum's outline series, TMH, 2006,

ISBN: 0070306419.

In case of a course having only theory, the following minimum guidelines may be

followed.

Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE)

( Theory – 100 Marks)

Evaluation method Course with Assignment

Quiz -1 10

Test -1 30

Quiz -2 10

Quiz -3 10

Test -2 30

Assignment 10

Total 100

Semester End Evaluation

Theory (100)

Part- –A

Objective type questions 20

Part –B

There should be five questions from five units. Each question should be for maximum

of 16 Marks.

The UNIT-1, UNIT-4 and UNIT-5 should not have any choice.

The UNIT-2 and UNIT-3 should have an internal choice.

Both the questions should be of the same complexity in terms of COs and Bloom’s

taxonomy level.

80

Total 100

Page 56: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

56

Note: The faculty teaching the course may adapt additional methods for evaluation

within the total maximum marks.

What To

whom

Frequency

of

conductio

n

Max

Mark

s

Evidence Contribution to

Course Outcome

Dir

ect

Ass

essm

ent

Met

hod

s CIE

Quiz

Student

s

Three 30 Answer

Scripts 80

%

100

%

90

%

Test Two 60/50

Assignment/Self

-study 2 phases 10/20

Reports /

Record

Books Laboratory Weekly 50

SE

E

Semester End

Examination

End of

every

semester

Consisting

of Part-A

and Part-B

100

Answer

Scripts

20

%

Semester End

Laboratory

End of

every

semester

laboratory

50

Ind

irec

t A

ssess

men

t

met

hod

s

Course End Survey Student

s

End of

course

Questionnair

e

Based on

COs

10%

Note: Individual faculty may adopt various methods for conducting effective quizzes

and evaluate the same. The frequency of quizzes may be more than three also.

CO-PO Mapping

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 H --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- L ---

CO2 --- H H H --- --- --- --- --- --- H M

CO3 --- H H H --- --- --- --- --- --- H L

CO4 --- H H --- H --- --- --- --- --- H M

Low-1Medium-2 High-3

Page 57: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

57

Semester: IV

Course Title: MICROPROCESSOR AND MICROCONTROLLERS

Course Code: 16TE45 CIE Marks: 100+50=150

Hrs/Week: L:T:P:S: 3:0:2:4 SEE Marks: 100+50=150

Credits: 05 SEE Duration: 3Hrs+3Hrs

Course Learning Objectives: The students will be able to

1 Explain the architecture of 8051 microcontroller and its peripherals.

2 Use software development tools to assemble, test and debug the programs.

3 Apply assembler directives in programming concepts.

4 Develop Microprocessor/ Microcontroller based system for a given application.

UNIT-I

MPU Organization:

CISC & RISC Design Philosophy, Harvard & Von-Neuman Architectures,

Microprocessor & Microcontroller, Intel’s 8086 architecture, Pin groups,

Functioning, Segmentation, Maximum Mode, Minimum Mode, Address

generation, Stack, Interrupts.

08 Hrs

UNIT-II

8086 Assembly Language Programming:

Addressing Modes of 8086, Instruction Formats, Program Development Tools,

Assembler Directives, Instruction Set of 8086. Data Transfer Instructions,

Arithmetic Instructions, Bit Manipulation Instructions, Branching Instructions,

Processor Control Instructions and String Instructions, Macros, Modular

Programs, Procedures, Assembly Language Programming Examples.

08 Hrs

UNIT-III

8086 Assembly Language Programming:

Assemble Level Programming examples for 8086

Hardware of 8051 Microcontrollers:

Introduction of Intel MCS 51 family, Comparison of Microprocessor and

Microcontroller, Architecture and Pin Functions of 8051 Microcontroller, CPU

Organization, Program Counter, Timing and Machine Cycles, Internal Memory

Organization, Registers, Stack.

08 Hrs

UNIT-IV

8051 Microcontroller Based System Design:

Input/output Port Programming, Programming timers, Asynchronous Serial Data

Communication, Interrupt Service Routines.

08 Hrs

UNIT-V

8051 Microcontroller Based System Design:

Programming in C, Interfacing Matrix Keyboard and Seven Segment Displays,

Interfacing ADC and DAC, Interfacing of LCD Display.

Advanced Processors & Controllers:

Parallel Architectures, Multicore Architectures, ARM. architecture

08 Hrs

Laboratory Experiments

ALP with 8086 using MASM

1. Data Transfer Programs: Block Moves & Exchange (With & Without Overlap) with

&without String Instructions.

2. Arithmetic Operations: Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication & Division on 32-Bit

Data.

3. Code Conversions: Use XLAT Instruction to Convert Binary to BCD, Binary to

Page 58: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

58

ASCII, Binary to Gray. Input from Keyboard & Display Result on the Console.

a. Search for a Key in an Array of Elements using Linear Search, Binary Search.

b. Sort An Array Using Bubble Sort & Selection Sort.

4. ASCII Operations: Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication & Division on 16-Bit Data

5. String Operations: Programs for String Concatenation, Reversing & Palindrome

Checking.

Write and execute the following programs for 8051 in Embedded C

1. Interface stepper motor to rotate in clockwise/ anti clockwise directions & and to

rotate the motor through predefined angle of rotation.

2. Interface DAC to generate sine wave.

3. Interface 4X4 keypad &display the key pressed on LCD

4. Interface ADC in polled mode, interrupt mode.

5. Speed control of DC motor.

6. Interfacing of mechanical relay to control AC device.

Course Outcomes: After completing the course, the students will be able to

1 Explain the design principles of processor/controller based system.

2 Identify the different operational & non operational attributes to be satisfied while

designing processor/controller based applications.

3 Analyze the execution of instructions/program and to write program for a given

application.

4 Evaluate the performance of different architectures to meet data processing needs of real

world applications

Reference Books

1. Douglas Hall, “Micro-Processors and Interfacing-Programming & Hardware”, TMH,

2nd Edition, 2002, ISBN : 0070257426

2. Barry B. Brey, “The Intel Micro-processors, Architecture, Programming and

Interfacing”, Pearson Education, 6th Edition, 2008, ISBN : 978-81-317-2622-8.

3. Muhammad A Mazidi; ”The 8051 Microcontroller and Embedded Systems”; Pearson

Education; 2009, ISBN : 978-81-317-1026-5.

4. Kenneth J. Ayala; “The 8051 Microcontroller Architecture, Programming

&Applications”;Thomson Learning; 2nd Edition, ISBN : 978-1401861582

Page 59: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

59

In case of a course having both Theory & Lab, the following minimum guidelines may

be followed

Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE)

( Theory – 100 Marks) (Laboratory- 50 Marks) Total

(150) Evaluation method Course with Self

Study

Quiz -1 10 Performance of the student in

the laboratory, every week 40

150

Test -1 25

Quiz -2 10

Quiz -3 10 Test at the end of the semester 10

Test -2 25

Self Study 20

Total

50 Total 100

Semester End Evaluation (SEE)

Theory (100 Marks) Laboratory(50 Marks) Total

(150)

Part- –A

Objective type questions

20 Experiment

Conduction with

proper results

40

150

Part –B

There should be five questions from five units.

Each question should be for maximum of 16

Marks.

The UNIT-1, UNIT-4 and UNIT-5 should not

have any choice.

The UNIT-2 and UNIT-3 should have an internal

choice.

Both the questions should be of the same

complexity in terms of COs and Bloom’s

taxonomy level.

80

Viva 10

Total

50 Total 100

Page 60: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

60

What To

whom

Frequency

of

conductio

n

Max

Mark

s

Evidence Contribution to

Course Outcome

Dir

ect

Ass

essm

ent

Met

hod

s CIE

Quiz

Student

s

Three 30 Answer

Scripts 80

%

100

%

90

%

Test Two 60/50

Assignment/Self

-study 2 phases 10/20

Reports /

Record

Books Laboratory Weekly 50

SE

E

Semester End

Examination

End of

every

semester

Consisting

of Part-A

and Part-B

100

Answer

Scripts

20

%

Semester End

Laboratory

End of

every

semester

laboratory

50

Ind

irec

t A

ssess

men

t

met

hod

s

Course End Survey Student

s

End of

course

Questionnair

e

Based on

COs

10%

Note: Individual faculty may adopt various methods for conducting effective quizzes

and evaluate the same. The frequency of quizzes may be more than three also.

CO-PO Mapping

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 H H H H --- L L L --- --- L M

CO2 H H H H H L L L --- L L ---

CO3 H H H H --- --- --- --- L --- M ---

CO4 H H H H M L L --- M --- H M

Low-1Medium-2 High-3

Page 61: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

61

Semester: IV

DATA STRUCTURES USING C++

Course Code: 16TE46 CIE Marks: 100

Hrs/Week: L:T:P:S: 3:0:0:4 SEE Marks: 100

Credits: 04 SEE Duration: 3Hrs

Course Learning Objectives: The students will be able to

1 Create classes of abstract data consisting of variables and functions

2 Utilize Object Oriented Programming features to write reusable codes.

3 Identify elementary Data Structures using C++ programming languages.

4 Create and utilize dynamic data structures using linked lists

UNIT-I

Overview of C++: Principles of object oriented Programming, Tokens,

Expressions and control structures, Classes and Objects, functions in C++,

Constructors and Destructors.

08 Hrs

UNIT-II

Features and Concepts of C++:

Operator Overloading and Type Conversions, Inheritance: Extending Classes,

Pointers, Virtual functions and polymorphism, Exception Handling, Templates.

08 Hrs

UNIT-III

Data Representation:

Introduction, Linear Lists, Formula-based Representation Linked Representation,

Indirect Addressing Simulating Pointers.

Arrays and Matrices : Arrays, Matrices, Special Matrices, Sparse Matrices.

08 Hrs

UNIT-IV

Stacks:

The Abstract Data Types, Derived Classes and Inheritance, Formula-based

Representation, Linked Representation, Applications-Towers of Hanoi,

Rearranging Railroad Cars.

Queues: The Abstract Data Types, Derived Classes and Inheritance, Formula-based

Representation, Linked Representation, Applications- Railroad Cars

Rearrangement, wire routing.

08 Hrs

UNIT-V

Binary and Other Trees:

Trees, Binary Trees, Properties and Representation of Binary Trees, Common

Binary Tree Operations, Binary Tree Traversal The ADT Binary Tree, ADT and

Class Extensions.

Graphs:

Definitions, Applications, properties, The ADTs Graph and Digraph,

Representation of Graphs and Digraphs, Representation of Networks, Class

Definitions.

08 Hrs

Course Outcomes: After completing the course, the students will be able to

1 Analyze basic C++ program, object oriented concepts in data structure design.

2 Apply data structures for data representations in stacks, queues, trees and graphs

3 Apply suitable data structures for various applications.

4 Implement the data structures and algorithms using C++

Page 62: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

62

Reference Books

1. E. Balaguruswamy, “Object Oriented Programming with C++”, McGraw Hill,

Company Ltd., Fourth Edition, ISBN: 0070593620.

2. Sartaj Sahni,“ Data Structures, Algorithms, and Applications in C++”, McGraw Hill,

2000, ISBN: 0-929306-33-3.

3. Yedidyah Langsam, Moshe J. Augenstein, Aron M Tenebaum,” Data Structure Using

C and C++”, Pearson Education, 2004, ISBN:81-203-1177-9

4. Maria Litvin and Gray Litvin: “Programming with C++ and Data Structures” –Vikas

Publication, 2003,ISBN: 0 – 13 –199204 – X. 2.

In case of a course having only theory, the following minimum guidelines may be

followed.

Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE)

( Theory – 100 Marks)

Evaluation method Course with Self-study

Quiz -1 10

Test -1 25

Quiz -2 10

Quiz -3 10

Test -2 25

Self-study (EL) 20

Total 100

Semester End Evaluation

Theory (100)

Part- –A

Objective type questions 20

Part –B

There should be five questions from five units. Each question should be for maximum

of 16 Marks.

The UNIT-1, UNIT-4 and UNIT-5 should not have any choice.

The UNIT-2 and UNIT-3 should have an internal choice.

Both the questions should be of the same complexity in terms of COs and Bloom’s

taxonomy level.

80

Total 100

Note: The faculty teaching the course may adapt additional methods for evaluation

within the total maximum marks.

Page 63: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

63

What To

whom

Frequency

of

conductio

n

Max

Mark

s

Evidence Contribution to

Course Outcome

Dir

ect

Ass

essm

ent

Met

hod

s CIE

Quiz

Student

s

Three 30 Answer

Scripts 80

%

100

%

90

%

Test Two 60/50

Assignment/Self

-study 2 phases 10/20

Reports /

Record

Books Laboratory Weekly 50

SE

E

Semester End

Examination

End of

every

semester

Consisting

of Part-A

and Part-B

100

Answer

Scripts

20

%

Semester End

Laboratory

End of

every

semester

laboratory

50

Ind

irec

t A

ssess

men

t

met

hod

s

Course End Survey Student

s

End of

course

Questionnair

e

Based on

COs

10%

Note: Individual faculty may adopt various methods for conducting effective quizzes

and evaluate the same. The frequency of quizzes may be more than three also.

CO-PO Mapping

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 H L H L H --- --- M L --- --- L

CO2 H H H L H --- --- M L --- --- L

CO3 H H M L H --- --- M L --- --- M

CO4 H H H H H --- --- M L --- --- H

Low-1Medium-2 High-3

Page 64: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

64

Page 65: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

65

Semester: IV

Course Title: TEAM WORK AND PROFESSIONAL ETHICS

Course Code:16HS47 CIE Marks: 50

Hrs/Week: L:T:P:S: SEE Marks: --

Credits: 01 SEE Duration: 3Hrs

Course Learning Objectives: The students will be able to

1 Understand their own communication style, the essentials of good communication and

develop their confidence to communicate effectively.

2 Manage stress by applying stress management skills.

3 Ability to give contribution to the planning and coordinate Team work.

4 Ability to analyze make problem solving decisions related to ethics.

UNIT-I

Communication Skills: Basics, Method, Means, Process and Purpose, Basics of

Business Communication, Written & Oral Communication, Listening.

Communication with Confidence & Clarity- Interaction with people, the need

the uses and the methods, Getting phonetically correct, using politically correct

language, Debate & Extempore.

06 Hrs

UNIT-II

Assertive Communication- Concept of Assertive communication, Importance

and applicability of Assertivecommunication,Assertive Words, being assertive.

Presentation Skills- Discussing the basic concepts ofpresentation

skills,Articulation Skills, IQ & GK, How to make effective presentations, body

language & Dress code in presentation, media of presentation.

06 Hrs

UNIT-III

Team Work- Team Work and its important elements Clarifying the advantages

and challenges of team work Understanding bargains in team building Defining

behavior to sync with team work Stages of Team Building Features of successful

teams.

Body Language & Proxemics - Rapport Building - Gestures, postures, facial

expression and body movements in different situations, Importance of Proxemics,

Right personal space to maintain with different people.

08 Hrs

UNIT-IV

Motivation and Stress Management: Self motivation, group motivation,

leadership abilities, Stress clauses and stress busters to handle stress and de-stress;

Understanding stress - Concept of sound body and mind, Dealing with anxiety,

tension, and relaxationtechniques. Individual Counseling & Guidance, Career

Orientation. Balancing Personal & Professional Life-

06 Hrs

UNIT-V

Professional Practice - Professional Dress Code, Time Sense, Respecting People

& their Space, Relevant Behavior at different Hierarchical Levels. Positive

Attitude, Self Analysis and Self Management.

Professional Ethics - values to be practiced, standards and codes to be adopted as

professional engineers in the society for various projects. Balancing Personal &

Professional Life

06 Hrs

Course Outcomes: After completing the course, the students will be able to

1

2

Page 66: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

66

3

4

Reference Books

1. Stephen R Covey, “The 7 Habits of Highly Effective People”, Free Press, 2004

Edition, ISBN: 0743272455

2. Dale Carnegie, “How to win friends and influence people”, General Press, 1st Edition,

2016, ISBN: 9789380914787

3. Kerry Patterson, Joseph Grenny, Ron Mcmillan, “Crucial Conversation: Tools for

Talking When Stakes are High”, McGraw-Hill Publication, 2012 Edition, ISBN:

9780071772204

4. Ethnus, “Aptimithra: Best Aptitude Book”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2014 Edition, ISBN:

9781259058738

Scheme of Continuous Internal Examination (CIE)

Evaluation will be carried out in TWOPhases.

Phase Activity Weightage

I Test 1 is conducted in III Sem for 50 marks (15 Marks Quiz and 35

Marks Descriptive answers) after completion of 2.5 units for 18 hours

of training sessions.

50%

II Test 2 is conducted in IV Sem for 50 marks ((15 Marks Quiz and 35

Marks Descriptive answers) after completion of half of IIIrd unit and

complete of unit IV and V for 18 hours of training sessions.

50%

At the end of the IV sem Marks of Test 1 and Test 2 is consolidated for 50 marks

and grading is done.

What To

whom

Frequenc

y of

conductio

n

Max

Mark

s

Evidence Contribution to

Course Outcome

Dir

ect

Ass

essm

ent

Met

hod

s CIE

Quiz

Student

s

Three 30 Answer

Scripts

80

%

100

%

90

%

Test Two 60/50

Assignment/Self

-study 2 phases 10/20 Reports /

Record

Books Laboratory Weekly 50

SE

E

Semester End

Examination

End of

every

semester

Consisting

of Part-A

and Part-B

100 Answer

Scripts

20

%

Page 67: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

67

Semester End

Laboratory

End of

every

semester

laboratory

50

Ind

irec

t A

ssess

men

t

met

ho

ds

Course End Survey Student

s

End of

course

Questionnair

e

Based on

COs

10%

Note: Individual faculty may adopt various methods for conducting effective quizzes

and evaluate the same. The frequency of quizzes may be more than three also.

CO-PO Mapping

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1

CO2

CO3

CO4

Low-1Medium-2 High-3

Semester: IV

Course Title: BRIDGE COURSE MATHEMATICS

Course Code: 16DMA48 CIE Marks: 50

Hrs/Week: L:T:P:S: 2:0:0:0 SEE Marks: 50

Credits: 02 SEE Duration: 1.5Hrs

Course Learning Objectives: The students will be able to

1 Acquire knowledge of multivariate functions, types of derivatives involved with these

functions, Jacobian as transformation factor and applications.

2

Enhance the knowledge level to visualize integrals in higher dimensional geometry,

possible representation and evaluation of geometrical and physical quantities in terms

of multiple integrals.

3 Recognize and model differential equations, apply analytic techniques to compute

solution for engineering problems.

Page 68: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

68

4 Acquire concepts of vector function, vector field, differential calculus of vector

functions in Cartesian coordinates.

5 Finding the approximate solutions using numerical methods, for problems which do not

have analytical solutions.

UNIT-I

DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS

Taylor and Maclaurin’s series for function of single variable.

Introduction-partial derivatives, simple problems. Total derivative, Composite

functions, Jacobians- simple problems.

06 Hrs

UNIT-II

MULTIPLE INTEGRALS

Evaluation of double and triple integrals – direct problems, change of order in

double integral, change of variables to polar, cylindrical and spherical coordinate

systems.

06 Hrs

UNIT-III

DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS

Higher order linear differential equations with constant coefficients,

Complementary function and Particular integral, problems. Equations with

variable coefficients – Cauchy and Legendre differential equations, problems.

06 Hrs

UNIT-IV

VECTOR DIFFERENTIATION

Introduction, simple problems in terms of velocity and acceleration. Concepts of

Gradient, Divergence- solenoidal vector function, Curl- irrotational vector

function and Laplacian, simple problems.

06 Hrs

UNIT-V

NUMERICAL METHODS Algebraic and transcendental equations – Regula-Falsi method, Newton-Raphson

method.

Ordinary Differential Equations – Taylor’s, modified Euler’s and 4th order Runge-

Kutta methods.

Numerical Integration – Simpson’s 1/3rd , 3/8th and Weddle’s rules.

06 Hrs

Course Outcomes: After completing the course, the students will be able to

1 Understand the significance of fundamental concepts of Mathematics in various

Engineering problems

2 Interpret the concept of differentiation, integration and differential equations in

Engineering and real life problems

3 Apply effectively appropriate quantitative tools and logical modes of thinking to analyze

for solving Engineering problems.

4 Justify the application of various Mathematical models and broaden the problem solving

skills in a wide range of intellectual domains.

Reference Books

3. B.S. Grewal; Higher Engineering Mathematics; Khanna Publishers; 40thEdition; 2007;

ISBN: 81-7409-195-5.

4. N.P Bali & Manish Goyal; A Text Book of Engineering Mathematics; Lakshmi

Publications; 7thEdition; 2010; ISBN: 978-81-7008-992-6; Chapters: 6, 18, 16, 8, 26;

Page 69: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

69

3. R.K. Jain & S.R.K. Iyengar; Advanced Engineering Mathematics; Narosa Publishing

House; 2002; 817319-420-3; Chapters: 1, 2, 8, 15;

4. ErwinKreyszig; Advanced Engineering Mathematics; John Wiley & Sons; 9thEdition;

2007; ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6; Chapters: 6, 10, 12;

In case of a course having only theory, the following minimum guidelines may be

followed.

Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE)

( Theory – 50 Marks)

Evaluation method Course with Assignment

Quiz -1 05

Test -1 15

Quiz -2 05

Quiz -3 05

Test -2 15

Assignment 05

Total 50

Semester End Evaluation

Theory (50)

Part- –A

Objective type questions 10

Part –B

There should be five questions from five units. Each question should be for maximum

of 16 Marks.

The UNIT-1, UNIT-4 and UNIT-5 should not have any choice.

The UNIT-2 and UNIT-3 should have an internal choice.

Both the questions should be of the same complexity in terms of COs and Bloom’s

taxonomy level.

40

Total 50

Note: The faculty teaching the course may adapt additional methods for evaluation

within the total maximum marks.

What To

whom

Frequenc

y of

conductio

n

Max

Mark

s

Evidence Contribution to

Course Outcome

Dir

ect

Ass

essm

ent

Met

ho

ds

CIE

Quiz

Student

s

Three 30 Answer

Scripts 80

%

100

%

90

%

Test Two 60/50

Assignment/Self

-study 2 phases 10/20 Reports /

Record

Page 70: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

70

Laboratory Weekly 50 Books

SE

E

Semester End

Examination

End of

every

semester

Consisting

of Part-A

and Part-B

100

Answer

Scripts

20

%

Semester End

Laboratory

End of

every

semester

laboratory

50

Ind

irec

t A

ssess

men

t

met

hod

s

Course End Survey Student

s

End of

course

Questionnair

e

Based on

COs

10%

Note: Individual faculty may adopt various methods for conducting effective quizzes

and evaluate the same. The frequency of quizzes may be more than three also.

CO-PO Mapping

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 H M --- --- --- --- --- --- --- L --- L

CO2 H M M L --- --- --- --- --- L --- L

CO3 H H M M M --- --- --- --- L --- L

CO4 H H H H M --- --- --- --- L --- L

Low-1Medium-2 High-3

Page 71: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

71

Semester: IV

Course Title: BRIDGE COURSE C PROGRAMMING

Course Code: 16DCS48 CIE Marks:50

Hrs/Week: L:T:P:S: 2:0:0:0 SEE Marks: 50

Credits: 02 SEE Duration: 1.5Hrs

Course Learning Objectives: The students will be able to

1 Develop arithmetic reasoning and analytical skills to apply knowledge of basic concepts

of programming in C.

2 Learn basic principles of problem solving through programming.

3 Write C programs using appropriate programming constructs adopted in programming.

4 Solve complex problems using C programming.

UNIT-I

Introduction to Reasoning, Algorithms and Flowcharts

Skill development – Examples related to Arithmetical Reasoning and Analytical

Reasoning. Fundamentals of algorithms and flowcharts.

Introduction to C programming

Basic structure of C program, Features of C language, Character set, C tokens,

Keywords and Identifiers, Constants, Variables, Data types.

Handling Input and Output operations

Reading a character, Writing a character, Formatted input/output functions,

Unformatted input/output functions.

05 Hrs

UNIT-II

Operators and Expressions Arithmetic operators, Relational operators, Logical Operators, Assignment

operators, Increment and decrement operators, Conditional operators, Bit-wise

operators, Arithmetic expressions, evaluation of expressions, Precedence of

arithmetic operators, Type conversion in expressions, Operator precedence and

associativity.

Programming Constructs

Decision Making and Branching Decision making with ‘if’ statement, Simple ‘if’ statement, the ‘if…else’

statement, nesting of ‘if…else’ statements, The ‘else if’ ladder, The ‘switch’

statement, The ‘?:’ operator, The ‘goto’ statement.

Decision making and looping The while statement, the do statement, The ‘for’

statement, Jumps in loops.

05 Hrs

UNIT-III

Arrays

One dimensional arrays, Declaration of one dimensional arrays. Initialization of

one dimensional arrays, Two dimensional arrays, Initializing two dimensional

arrays.

Character Arrays and Strings

Declaring and Initializing String Variables, Reading Strings from Terminal,

Writing strings to screen, Arithmetic Operations on characters, String operations

using with and without String handling functions.

04 Hrs

UNIT-IV

User-defined functions 06 Hrs

Page 72: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

72

Need for User Defined Functions, Definition of functions, Return values and their

types, Function calls, Function declaration, Category of functions, Nesting of

functions, Functions with arrays, Storage classes.

Structures and Unions

Introduction, Structure definition, Declaring structure variables, Accessing

structure members, Structure initialization, Copying and comparing structure

variables, Arrays of structure, Arrays within structures, Structures and functions,

Unions.

UNIT-V

Pointers

Introduction , Accessing the address of a variable, Declaring and initializing of

pointer variables, Accessing a variable using pointers, Chain of pointers, Pointer

expressions, Pointer increments and scale factor, Pointers and arrays, Pointers and

character strings.

File Managements in C

Basic concepts of files, Defining and opening a file, closing of a file, Input/Output

operations on files.

04 Hrs

Course Outcomes: After completing the course, the students will be able to

1 Understand and explore the fundamental computer concepts and basic programming

principles like data types, input/output functions, operators, programming constructs and

user defined functions.

2 Analyze and Develop algorithmic solutions to problems

3 Implement and Demonstrate capabilities of writing ‘C’ programs in optimized, robust

and reusable code.

4 Apply appropriate concepts of data structures like arrays, structures, and files to

implement programs for various applications.

Reference Books

1. P. Dey, M. Ghosh, “Programming in C”, Oxford University press, First Edition, 2007,

ISBN (13): 9780195687910.

2. Kernighan B.W and Dennis M. Ritchie, “The C Programming Language”, Second

Edition, Prentice Hall, 2005, ISBN (13): 9780131101630.

3. H. Schildt, Turbo C: The Complete Reference, Mcgraw Hill Education, 4th Edition,

2000, ISBN-13: 9780070411838.

4. Yashavant P. Kanetkar, “Understanding Pointers in C”, BPB publications, 3rd edition,

ISBN-13: 978-8176563581.

In case of a course having only theory, the following minimum guidelines may be

followed.

Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE)

( Theory –50 Marks)

Evaluation method Course with Assignment

Quiz -1 10

Test -1 30

Quiz -2 10

Quiz -3 10

Page 73: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

73

Test -2 30

Assignment 10

Total 100

Semester End Evaluation

Theory (100)

Part- –A

Objective type questions 20

Part –B

There should be five questions from five units. Each question should be for maximum

of 16 Marks.

The UNIT-1, UNIT-4 and UNIT-5 should not have any choice.

The UNIT-2 and UNIT-3 should have an internal choice.

Both the questions should be of the same complexity in terms of COs and Bloom’s

taxonomy level.

80

Total 100

Note: The faculty teaching the course may adapt additional methods for evaluation

within the total maximum marks.

Page 74: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

74

What To

whom

Frequency

of

conductio

n

Max

Mark

s

Evidence Contribution to

Course Outcome

Dir

ect

Ass

essm

ent

Met

hod

s CIE

Quiz

Student

s

Three 30 Answer

Scripts 80

%

100

%

90

%

Test Two 60/50

Assignment/Self

-study 2 phases 10/20

Reports /

Record

Books Laboratory Weekly 50

SE

E

Semester End

Examination

End of

every

semester

Consisting

of Part-A

and Part-B

100

Answer

Scripts

20

%

Semester End

Laboratory

End of

every

semester

laboratory

50

Ind

irec

t A

ssess

men

t

met

hod

s

Course End Survey Student

s

End of

course

Questionnair

e

Based on

COs

10%

Note: Individual faculty may adopt various methods for conducting effective quizzes

and evaluate the same. The frequency of quizzes may be more than three also.

CO-PO Mapping

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 H L H L H --- --- M L --- --- L

CO2 H H H L H --- --- M L --- --- L

CO3 H H M L H --- --- M L --- --- M

CO4 H H H H H --- --- M L --- --- H

Low-1Medium-2 High-3

Page 75: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

75

R. V. COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING, BENGALURU – 59.

(An Autonomous Institution affiliated to VTU, Belgavi)

DEPARTMENT OF TELECOMMUNICATION ENGINEERING SCHEME OF TEACHING AND EXAMINATION

FIFTH SEMESTER

Sl.

No Course Code Course Title BOS

Credit Allocation Total

Credits Lecture Tutorial Practical SS (EL)

1 16HSI51 IPR & Entrepreneurship HSS 3 0 0 0 3

2 16TE52 Digital Signal Processing TE 3 0 1 1 5

3 16TE53 Digital Communication TE 3 0 1 1 5

4 16TE54 Telecom Switching System TE 3 0 0 0 3

5 16TE55 Microwave Engineering TE 3 1 0 0 4

6 16TE5AX Elective A (PE) TE 3 1 0 0 4

7 16GE5BXX Elective B (OE) TE 3 0 0 1 4

Total No. of Credits 28

No. Of Hrs. 21 4 4 12** 29

**Non contact hours

Page 76: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

76

Programs Semester Course Code/ Course

Title Semester Course Code / Course Title

EC,CS,EE,IS,TE 5 16HSI51

IPR & Entrepreneurship 6

16HEM61

Foundations of Management &

Economics

ME,CH,IM,EI,CV,BT,AS 5

16HEM51

Foundations of

Management &

Economics

6 16HSI61

IPR & Entrepreneurship

Elective A (PE) Elective Title (PE) Elective B (OE) Elective Title (OE)

16TE5A1 Digital Design and Verification

using Verilog

16GE5BXX Telecommunication Systems

16TE5A2 Control Systems

16TE5A3 Video Engineering/

Digital Video Broadcasting

16TE5A4 Computer Organization and

Architecture

Page 77: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

77

R. V. COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING, BENGALURU – 59.

(An Autonomous Institution affiliated to VTU, Belgavi)

DEPARTMENT OF TELECOMMUNICATION ENGINEERING SCHEME OF TEACHING AND EXAMINATION

SIXTH SEMESTER

Sl.

No. Course Code Course Title BOS

Credit Allocation Total

Credits Lecture Tutorial Practical SS

(EL)

1 16HEM61 Foundations of Management &

Economics HSS 2 0 0 0 2

2 16TE62 Computer Communication

Networks TE 4 0 1 0 5

3 16TE63 Information Theory & Coding TE 3 1 0 0 4

4 16TE64 Radiating Systems TE 3 0 1 1 5

5 16TE6CX Elective C (PE) TE 3 1 0 0 4

6 16TE6DX Elective D (PE) TE 3 0 0 1 4

7 16GE6XX Elective E(O E) TE 3 0 0 0 3

8 16HS68

Professional Practice-III

(Employability Skills and

Professional Development of

Engineers)$$

HSS 1 0 0 0 1

Total No. of Credits 28

No. Of Hrs. 22 4 4 8** 30

$$ 3 days (18 Hrs) in 5th semester and 3 days (18 Hrs) in 6th semester **Non contact hours

Page 78: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

78

Elective C (PE) Elective Title Elective D (PE) Elective Title Elective E (OE) Elective Title

16TE6C1 CMOS Circuit

Design 16TE6D1

Microwave Integrated

Circuits

16GE6BXX

Mobile Network

System and standards

16TE6C2 ARM Processor 16TE6D2 Digital Signal

Processor

Architecture

16TE6C3 Multimedia

Communication 16TE6D3

Cryptography and

Network Security

16TE6C4 Operating Systems 16TE6D4 JAVA

Page 79: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

79

Semester: V

Course Title: INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS AND ENTREPRENEURSHIP Course Code: 12HSI51 CIE Marks: 100

Hrs/Week: L:T:P:S: 3:0:0:0 SEE Marks: 100

Credits: 03 SEE Duration: 3Hrs

Course Learning Objectives: The students will be able to

1 To build awareness on the various forms of IPR and to educate on the link between

technology innovation and IPR.

2 To promote linkages with industries and stimulate research through developing and

utilizing novel technologies.

3 Assess their own strengths and identify gaps that need to be addressed to become a

successful entrepreneur

4 Acquire the skills and knowledge related to the various phases in the venture creation

process such as creating a business model and building a prototype

UNIT-I

Introduction: Types of Intellectual Property,WIPO, WTO, TRIPS.Patents:

Introduction, Scope and salient features of patent; patentable and non patentable

inventions, Patent Procedure- Overview, Transfer of Patent Rights; Biotechnology

patents, protection of traditional knowledge, Infringement of patents and remedy,

Case studies

Trade Secrets: Definition, Significance, Tools to protect Trade secrets in India.

07 Hrs

UNIT-II

Trade Marks: Concept, function and different kinds and forms of Trade marks,

Registrable and non- registrable marks. Registration of trade mark; Deceptive

similarity; Assignment and transmission; ECO Label, Passing off; Offences and

penalties. Infringement of trade mark with Case studies

04 Hrs

UNIT-III

Industrial Design: Introduction, Protection of Industrial Designs, Protection and

Requirements for Industrial |Design. Procedure for obtaining Design Protection,

Revocation, Infringement and Remedies , Case studies

Copy Right: Introduction, Nature and scope, Rights conferred by copy right,

Copy right protection, transfer of copy rights, right of broad casting organizations

and performer’s rights, Case Studies.

Intellectual property and cyberspace: Emergence of cyber-crime ; Grant in

software patent and Copyright in software; Software piracy; Data protection in

cyberspace

09Hrs

UNIT-IV

Introduction to Entrepreneurship – a. Meaning and Definition, E-Cell,

Entrepreneurial DNA, Traits and Gap analysis, Entrepreneurial Success Stories,

Creative and Design Thinking, Communication,

Personal Selling: Show and Tell, Risk -taking and Resilience. Concept of

prototyping, Idea Validation (Product-Market Fit), Early attempts to sell the

product or service,

Understand customer perspective: how the proposed product/solution will be

used, value perception, Early insights on customer segmentation - primary

customer segment, alternate customer segments, Early insights on pricing, cost

and margins.

08 Hrs

UNIT-V

Page 80: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

80

Business Model and Plan: Develop and validate a business model, Visioning for

venture, Marketing the Business, Establish the success and operational metrics ,

Minimum Viable Product and the lean method,

Managing start - up finance, Customer Development and Experience, Early

insights on cost of customer acquisition, Clarifying the value proposition. Legal

and regulatory aspects for starting up specific to the venture. Enhancing the

growth process and creating scalability ((customers, market share and/or sales).

08 Hrs

Course Outcomes: After completing the course, the students will be able to

1 Comprehend the applicable source, scope and limitations of Intellectual Property within

the perview of engineering domain.

2 Knowledge and competence related exposure to the various Legal issues pertaining to

Intellectual Property Rights with the utility in engineering perspectives

3 Learn about opportunity discovery and evaluation of viable business ideas for new

venture creation.

Reference Books

1. Wadehra B L “Law Relating to Intellectual Property”, Universal Law Pub Co. Ltd.-

Delhi, 5th Edition, 2012, ISBN: 9789350350300, 9350350300,

2. Prabuddha Ganguly, “Intellectual Property Rights: Unleashing Knowledge

Economy”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi, 1st Edition,

2001. ISBN: 0074638602.

3. Rodney Ryder – Intellectual Property and the Internet, Publisher Lexis Nexis U.K.,

2002 ISBN: 8180380025, 9788180380020

In case of a course having only theory, the following minimum guidelines may be

followed.

Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE)

( Theory – 100 Marks)

Evaluation method Course with Assignment

Quiz -1 10

Test -1 30

Quiz -2 10

Quiz -3 10

Test -2 30

Assignment 10

Total 100

Semester End Evaluation

Theory (100)

Part- –A

Objective type questions 20

Part –B

There should be five questions from five units. Each question should be for maximum

of 16 Marks.

The UNIT-1, UNIT-4 and UNIT-5 should not have any choice.

80

Page 81: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

81

The UNIT-2 and UNIT-3 should have an internal choice.

Both the questions should be of the same complexity in terms of COs and Bloom’s

taxonomy level.

Total 100

Note: The faculty teaching the course may adapt additional methods for evaluation

within the total maximum marks.

Page 82: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

82

What To

whom

Frequency

of

conductio

n

Max

Mark

s

Evidence Contribution to

Course Outcome

Dir

ect

Ass

essm

ent

Met

hod

s CIE

Quiz

Student

s

Three 30 Answer

Scripts 80

%

100

%

90

%

Test Two 60/50

Assignment/Self

-study 2 phases 10/20

Reports /

Record

Books Laboratory Weekly 50

SE

E

Semester End

Examination

End of

every

semester

Consisting

of Part-A

and Part-B

100

Answer

Scripts

20

%

Semester End

Laboratory

End of

every

semester

laboratory

50

Ind

irec

t A

ssess

men

t

met

hod

s

Course End Survey Student

s

End of

course

Questionnair

e

Based on

COs

10%

Note: Individual faculty may adopt various methods for conducting effective quizzes

and evaluate the same. The frequency of quizzes may be more than three also.

CO-PO Mapping

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 --- --- --- --- --- M L H --- --- --- ---

CO2 --- --- --- M --- L --- --- H --- --- M

CO3 --- --- --- --- --- --- M --- --- --- --- H

Low-1Medium-2 High-3

Page 83: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

83

Semester: V

DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING

Course Code: 16TE52 CIE Marks: 100+50=150

Hrs/Week: L:T:P:S: 3:0:2:4 SEE Marks: 100+50=150

Credits: 05 SEE Duration: 3Hrs+3Hrs

Course Learning Objectives: The students will be able to

1 Analyze the time domain and frequency domain representations of discrete-time

signals.

2 Apply efficient method for calculating the DFT & IDFT.

3 Design & implement FIR & IIR filters.

4 Perform Frequency transformations in Analog and Digital domains.

5 Define the various structures for discrete-time systems.

UNIT-I

Discrete Fourier Transform: Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT), DFT as a linear

Transformation and Relationship of DFT to other transform.

Properties of DFT: Periodicity, Linearity and Symmetry properties,

Multiplication of two DFTs and circular convolution, additional DFT properties.

Linear filtering methods based on the DFT: Use of DFT in linear filtering,

Filtering of long data sequences.

08 Hrs

UNIT-II

Frequency Analysis of Signals using DFT.

Discrete Cosine Transform (DCT): Forward DCT, Inverse DCT, Relationships

between DFT and DCT, Energy Compaction property of DCT.

Efficient computation of DFT: FFT Algorithms

Direct computation of DFT, Divide and conquer approach to computation of DFT,

Radix-2 FFT Algorithms for the computation of DFT and Inverse DFT.

08 Hrs

UNIT-III

Design of Digital Filters: Causality and its Implications, Characteristics of practical Frequency Selective

Filters.

Design of FIR Filters: Symmetric and anti-symmetric FIR Filters, Design of

Linear phase FIR Filters using Windows, Design of Linear phase FIR filters by

frequency Sampling method, Design of FIR Differentiators and Hilbert

Transformers.

08 Hrs

UNIT-IV

Analog Filters: Characteristics of commonly used Analog Filters – Butterworth

and Chebyshev Type-1 filters.

Design of Digital IIR Filter from Analog Filters:

IIR Filter design by Impulse Invariance, IIR Filter Design by the Bilinear

Transformation.

Frequency Transformations: Frequency transformation in the Analog Domain,

Frequency transformation in the Digital Domain.

08 Hrs

UNIT-V

Structures for the realization of the discrete time systems:

Structures for FIR systems: Direct form structure, Cascade form structures,

frequency Sampling structures, lattice Structure.

Structure for IIR systems: Direct form structures, Signal Flow Graphs and

Transposed Structures, Cascade Form Structures, Parallel- Form and Lattice

08 Hrs

Page 84: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

84

Structures.

Laboratory Experiments

Part – A

Simulation using MATLAB/SCILAB tool.

1. Computation of DFT, IDFT

2. Computation of Circular and Linear Convolution, and Correlation.

3. Computation of Response of digital systems

4. Design and simulation of digital filters.

Part – B

Simulation using DSP hardware.

1. Implementation of various operations: DFT, IDFT, Convolution and Correlation.

2. Design and implementation of various digital filters.

Course Outcomes: After completing the course, the students will be able to

1 Analyze signals and perform various signal processing operations, using DFT.

2 Explain and implement the FFT algorithms for efficient computation of the DFT.

3 Design, implement and present various digital filters for the required specifications

4 Evaluate the digital signal processing systems using simulation tool and DSP processors.

Reference Books

1. Proakis G, Dimitris G. Manolakis; “Digital Signal Processing”; PHI; 4th Edition;

2007, ISBN: 81-317-1000-9.

2. Lonnie C. Ludeman; “Fundamentals of Digital Signal Processing” ; John Wiley &

Sons; 2013; ISBN: 978-81-265-2222-4.

3. Monson H.Hayes; “Digital Signal Processing”; Schaum’s Outline Series; 2nd Edition;

2011; ISBN: 0071635092.

4. Alan .V. Oppemheim; “Discrete Time Signal Processing”; PHI; 2nd Edition; 2002;

ISBN: 81-7808-244-6.

In case of a course having both Theory & Lab, the following minimum guidelines may

be followed

Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE)

( Theory – 100 Marks) (Laboratory- 50 Marks) Total

(150) Evaluation method Course with Self

Study

Quiz -1 10 Performance of the student in

the laboratory, every week 40

150

Test -1 25

Quiz -2 10

Quiz -3 10 Test at the end of the semester 10

Test -2 25

Self Study 20

Total

50 Total 100

Page 85: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

85

Semester End Evaluation (SEE)

Theory (100 Marks) Laboratory(50 Marks) Total

(150)

Part- –A

Objective type questions

20 Experiment

Conduction with

proper results

40

150

Part –B

There should be five questions from five units.

Each question should be for maximum of 16

Marks.

The UNIT-1, UNIT-4 and UNIT-5 should not

have any choice.

The UNIT-2 and UNIT-3 should have an internal

choice.

Both the questions should be of the same

complexity in terms of COs and Bloom’s

taxonomy level.

80

Viva 10

Total

50 Total 100

Page 86: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

86

What To

whom

Frequency

of

conductio

n

Max

Mark

s

Evidence Contribution to

Course Outcome

Dir

ect

Ass

essm

ent

Met

hod

s CIE

Quiz

Student

s

Three 30 Answer

Scripts 80

%

100

%

90

%

Test Two 60/50

Assignment/Self

-study 2 phases 10/20

Reports /

Record

Books Laboratory Weekly 50

SE

E

Semester End

Examination

End of

every

semester

Consisting

of Part-A

and Part-B

100

Answer

Scripts

20

%

Semester End

Laboratory

End of

every

semester

laboratory

50

Ind

irec

t A

ssess

men

t

met

hod

s

Course End Survey Student

s

End of

course

Questionnair

e

Based on

COs

10%

Note: Individual faculty may adopt various methods for conducting effective quizzes

and evaluate the same. The frequency of quizzes may be more than three also.

CO-PO Mapping

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 H M --- H M --- --- --- --- --- --- L

CO2 H M --- --- M --- --- --- --- --- --- L

CO3 H H M M H --- --- --- M M L M

CO4 H H H M H --- --- --- M M L M

Low-1Medium-2 High-3

Page 87: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

87

Semester: V

Course Title: DIGITAL COMMUNICATION

Course Code: 16TE53 CIE Marks: 100+50=150

Hrs/Week: L:T:P:S: 3:0:2:4 SEE Marks: 100+50=150

Credits: 05 SEE Duration: 3Hrs+3Hrs

Course Learning Objectives: The students will be able to

1 Explain the principles of Digital communication Systems.

2 Compare different modulation techniques and its application.

3 Analyze various spread spectrum concepts and their applications

4 Design sub systems with software/hardware and analyze their performances.

UNIT-I

Base-band shaping for Data Transmission: Discrete PAM signals, power

spectra of discrete PAM signals(Derivation of power spectra for NRZ,RZ only),

ISI, Nyquist criterion for distortion less base-band binary transmission, correlative

coding, eye pattern, base-band M-ary PAM systems for data transmission,

Adaptive Equalization for data transmission.

08 Hrs

UNIT-II

Detection Concepts:

Model of Digital communication System; Gram-Schmidt Orthogonalization

Procedure; Geometric Interpretation of Signals; Response of Bank Correlators to

Noisy Input; Detection of known signals in noise; Probability of Error;

Correlation Receiver; Matched Filter Receiver.

08 Hrs

UNIT-III

Digital Modulation Techniques-I:

Digital Modulation Formats; Coherent Binary Modulation Techniques; Coherent

Quadrature-Modulation Techniques; Non-coherent detection Techniques;

Comparison of various modulation techniques, QAM techniques, applications-

Digital radio and voice grade modem.

08 Hrs

UNIT-IV

Digital Modulation Techniques- II:

M-ary Modulation Techniques, QAM Modulation, Power Spectra, Bandwidth

Efficiency, Effect of ISI, Bit versus Symbol Error Probabilities, Synchronization,

Applications-Digital radio and voice grade modem.

Multi Carrier Modulation: Multi- Channel Radio, Discrete Multi Tone data

transmission system. OFDM.

08 Hrs

UNIT-V

Spread Spectrum Modulation:

Notion of Spread Spectrum, PN sequences, DSS Coherent Binary PSK, Signal-

Space Dimensionality and Processing Gain, Probability of Error, Frequency-Hop

spread Spectrum, Applications.

08 Hrs

Laboratory Experiments

Part A

The students are expected to simulate the following circuits/systems using LabVIEW.

1. Time Division Multiplexing.

2. ASK, FSK , BPSK, DPSK & QPSK generation and detection, BER analysis.

3. Quadrature Amplitude modulation – generation and detection, BER analysis.

Page 88: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

88

4. Spread Spectrum systems –DSSS and FHSS.

Part B

The students are expected to implement the following circuits on hardware.

1. Time Division Multiplexing.

2. Generation and Detection of ASK, FSK and BPSK signals.

3. Generation and Detection of Quadrature Phase Shift Keying & Differential Phase

Shift keying

4. Spread Spectrum –FHSS generation and Detection.

Course Outcomes: After completing the course, the students will be able to

1 Explain basic principles of baseband Pulse Shaping and digital modulation techniques.

2 Apply Probability Theory, Random Variables, Random process knowledge in

formulating mathematical model for digital Communication system and Information

Theory

3 Demonstrate the implementation of digital modulation and demodulation.

4 Evaluate and compare the performance of Digital Modulation Techniques.

Reference Books

1. Simon Haykin, “Digital communication”, John Wiley, Reprint 2009. ISBN :

9788126508242

2. Simon Haykin, “Communication Systems”, 4th Edition, John Wiley and Sons, 2006.

ISBN : 9788126509041

3. Cory L.Cork, “LabVIEW Digital Signal Processing and Digital Communications”,

Tata McGraw Hill, 2005. ISBN : 007060141

In case of a course having both Theory & Lab, the following minimum guidelines may

be followed

Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE)

( Theory – 100 Marks) (Laboratory- 50 Marks) Total

(150) Evaluation method Course with Self

Study

Quiz -1 10 Performance of the student in

the laboratory, every week 40

150

Test -1 25

Quiz -2 10

Quiz -3 10 Test at the end of the semester 10

Test -2 25

Self Study 20

Total

50 Total 100

Page 89: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

89

What To

whom

Frequency

of

conductio

n

Max

Mark

s

Evidence Contribution to

Course Outcome

Dir

ect

Ass

essm

ent

Met

hod

s CIE

Quiz

Student

s

Three 30 Answer

Scripts 80

%

100

%

90

%

Test Two 60/50

Assignment/Self

-study 2 phases 10/20

Reports /

Record

Books Laboratory Weekly 50

SE

E

Semester End

Examination

End of

every

semester

Consisting

of Part-A

and Part-B

100

Answer

Scripts

20

%

Semester End

Laboratory

End of

every

semester

laboratory

50

Ind

irec

t A

ssess

men

t

met

hod

s

Course End Survey Student

s

End of

course

Questionnair

e

Based on

COs

10%

Note: Individual faculty may adopt various methods for conducting effective quizzes

and evaluate the same. The frequency of quizzes may be more than three also.

CO-PO Mapping

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 H M M --- --- --- --- --- --- M --- ---

CO2 M H H M H --- --- --- --- M --- H

CO3 M H H M H --- --- --- L --- --- H

CO4 --- H H H --- --- --- --- --- --- --- H

Low-1Medium-2 High-3

Page 90: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

90

Semester: V

Course Title : TELECOM SWITCHING SYSTEM

Course Code: 16TE54 CIE Marks: 100

Hrs/Week: L:T:P:S: 3:0:0:0 SEE Marks: 100

Credits: 03 SEE Duration: 3Hrs

Course Learning Objectives: The students will be able to

1 Define the importance of switching over wired and wireless channels.

2 Digitize voice signal and code it using different techniques

3 Explain switching, signaling, traffic and standards in telecommunication networks.

4 Analyze how a telecommunication network handles traffic.

UNIT-I

Introduction to telecommunication switching:

Electro mechanical & Electronic switching, message switching, circuit switching,

register-translator, senders, distribution frames, cross bar systems, need of

trunking, electronic switching, reed-electronic systems, digital systems.

08 Hrs

UNIT-II

Introduction to digital networks :

Introduction, Voice digitization, TDM, Data over voice, Fiber optic transmission,

Digital switching, Digital Network Evolution, Advantages of digital voice

Networks, DSP applications, Disadvantages of Digital Voice Networks.

Voice digitization: Adaptive predictive coding, Subband coding, Vocoders,

Encoder / Decoder selection considerations.

08 Hrs

UNIT-III

Digital switching:

Switching Functions, Space division switching, Time division switching, Two

dimension switching, Digital cross connect systems, Digital switching in analog

environment.

08 Hrs

UNIT-IV

Telecommunication traffic: Introduction, the unit of traffic, congestion, traffic measurement, a mathematical

model, cost-call systems, queuing systems, simulation.

Switching networks:

Single-stage networks, Principle of gradings, Design of progressive grading,

Types of grading, Traffic capacity of gradings, Applications of gradings, link

systems.

08 Hrs

UNIT V

Switching networks: Grades of service of link systems, application of graph theory to link systems,

stick-sense non blocking networks, sectionalized switching networks

Digital subscriber access:

Integrated services digital network, High-data-rate digital subscriber loops, Digital

loop carrier systems, Fiber in the loop, Hybrid fiber coax systems, Voice band

modems, local microwave distribution service, Digital satellite services.

08 Hrs

Course Outcomes: After completing the course, the students will be able to

1 Explain the concepts of switching in wired and wireless communication.

2 Identify the classes of switching and grading analysis for a given switching network.

3 Analyze the importance of telecommunication services

Page 91: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

91

4 Design telecommunication networks for switching, signaling and traffic standards.

Reference Books

1. J.E.Flood-“Telecommunications, switching traffic and networks”- Pearson education

Ltd, 2005, ISBN: 1844860140.

2. John C.Bellamy-“Digital Telephony”-Wiley series, 3rd Edition, 2002.

ISBN:9814126357

3. Thiagarajan Viswanathan-“Telecommunication switching systems and networks”-

Prentice Hall, 2004, ISBN 1587202166.

In case of a course having only theory, the following minimum guidelines may be

followed.

Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE)

( Theory – 100 Marks)

Evaluation method Course with Assignment

Quiz -1 10

Test -1 30

Quiz -2 10

Quiz -3 10

Test -2 30

Assignment 10

Total 100

Semester End Evaluation

Theory (100)

Part- –A

Objective type questions 20

Part –B

There should be five questions from five units. Each question should be for maximum

of 16 Marks.

The UNIT-1, UNIT-4 and UNIT-5 should not have any choice.

The UNIT-2 and UNIT-3 should have an internal choice.

Both the questions should be of the same complexity in terms of COs and Bloom’s

taxonomy level.

80

Total 100

Note: The faculty teaching the course may adapt additional methods for evaluation

within the total maximum marks.

Page 92: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

92

What To

whom

Frequency

of

conductio

n

Max

Mark

s

Evidence Contribution to

Course Outcome

Dir

ect

Ass

essm

ent

Met

hod

s CIE

Quiz

Student

s

Three 30 Answer

Scripts 80

%

100

%

90

%

Test Two 60/50

Assignment/Self

-study 2 phases 10/20

Reports /

Record

Books Laboratory Weekly 50

SE

E

Semester End

Examination

End of

every

semester

Consisting

of Part-A

and Part-B

100

Answer

Scripts

20

%

Semester End

Laboratory

End of

every

semester

laboratory

50

Ind

irec

t A

ssess

men

t

met

hod

s

Course End Survey Student

s

End of

course

Questionnair

e

Based on

COs

10%

Note: Individual faculty may adopt various methods for conducting effective quizzes

and evaluate the same. The frequency of quizzes may be more than three also.

CO-PO Mapping

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 L M --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

CO2 --- M H H --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

CO3 --- H H M M L --- M H H M ---

CO4 --- --- --- H H --- --- --- --- M --- H

Low-1Medium-2 High-3

Page 93: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

93

Semester: V

Course Title: MICROWAVE ENGINEERING

Course Code: 16TE55 CIE Marks: 100

Hrs/Week: L:T:P:S: 3:2:0:0 SEE Marks: 100

Credits: 04 SEE Duration: 3Hrs

Course Learning Objectives: The students will be able to

1 Use the concept of Electromagnetic field theory and network analysis to analyze

microwave transmission line and Waveguides

2 Design an impedance matching circuit at microwave frequency using transmission

lines.

3 Analyze the characteristics of Microwave passive devices, active devices and vacuum

tube devices.

4 Measure various network parameters used to analyze microwave networks.

UNIT-I

Introduction to Microwaves – Properties, Frequency bands, Application of

Microwaves in Domestic, Industrial and Medical fields, Microwave Hazards.

Transmission Line Theory:

The Lumped- Element Circuit Model for a Transmission Line- Wave Propagation

on a Transmission Line, The Lossless Line, The Terminated Lossless

Transmission Line- Special Cases of Lossless Terminated Lines, The Slotted Line,

The Quarter Wave Transformer – The Impedance Viewpoint, Generator and Load

Mismatches- Load Matched to Line, Generator matched to Load Line, Conjugate

Matching, Lossy Transmission Lines- The Low Loss Line, The Distortionless

Line, The Terminated Lossy Line.

09 Hrs

UNIT-II

High Frequency Lines and Waveguides:

Rectangular Waveguide-TE modes, TM modes for unloaded rectangular

waveguides from Maxwell’s equations, Attenuation as function of frequency,

Excitation of Waveguides – Aperture Coupling (Qualitative Discussion), Coaxial

Line – TEM modes, Higher order modes, Microstrip - Formulas for Effective

Dielectric Constant, Characteristic Impedance and Attenuation.

09 Hrs

UNIT-III

Basic Smith chart &Impedance Matching and Tuning:

Smith Chart – Construction , Basic Smith Chart Operations ,Smith chart types-

Impedance and Admittance Chart

Single Stub Tuning- Shunt Stubs, Series Stubs, Double Stub Tuning- only Smith

Chart Solution

09 Hrs

UNIT-IV

Microwave Network Analysis & Passive Devices

Review of S parameters and their properties.

Passive Devices: - Attenuators, Basic Properties of power Dividers and Couplers,

Magic Tee junctions, Ferrite Isolators , Ferrite Phase shifters and Ferrite

Circulators.

09Hrs

UNIT-V

Active RF Components:

Microwave Diode characteristics-Schottky Diodes and Detectors, PIN diodes, 09 Hrs

Page 94: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

94

Gunn diode-Modes and construction, RF Transistor construction and

characteristics – FETs, BJTs, Microwave Integrated Circuits-Hybrid Microwave

Integrated Circuits, Monolithic Microwave Integrated Circuits.

Microwave Vacuum Tube Devices:

Reflex Klystrons, Travelling Wave Tubes and Cylindrical Magnetrons–

Construction, Operation ( only Qualitative Discussion).

Course Outcomes: After completing the course, the students will be able to

1 Define the circuit parameters for design of microwave subsystems using active and

passive devices.

2 Identify and design the transmission line for a given application.

3 Apply Smith Chart for microwave network/circuit analysis.

4 Compute microwave network/circuit parameters and Evaluate their performances.

Reference Books

1. David M Pozar ,“Microwave Engineering” John Wiley, 3rd edition, 2011, ISBN-978-

81-265-1049-8

2. Annapurna Das, Sisir K das, “Microwave Engineering”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2nd

Edition reprint, 2011, ISBN -13:978-0-07-066738-9, ISBN – 10: -0-07-066738-1.

3. Samuel .Y.Liao, “Microwave devices and circuits” ,PHI, 3rd Edition, 2000, ISBN-81-

203-0699-6.

In case of a course having only theory, the following minimum guidelines may be

followed.

Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE)

( Theory – 100 Marks)

Evaluation method Course with Assignment

Quiz -1 10

Test -1 30

Quiz -2 10

Quiz -3 10

Test -2 30

Assignment 10

Total 100

Semester End Evaluation

Theory (100)

Part- –A

Objective type questions 20

Part –B

There should be five questions from five units. Each question should be for maximum

of 16 Marks.

The UNIT-1, UNIT-4 and UNIT-5 should not have any choice.

The UNIT-2 and UNIT-3 should have an internal choice.

Both the questions should be of the same complexity in terms of COs and Bloom’s

taxonomy level.

80

Page 95: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

95

Total 100

Note: The faculty teaching the course may adapt additional methods for evaluation

within the total maximum marks.

What To

whom

Frequency

of

conductio

n

Max

Mark

s

Evidence Contribution to

Course Outcome

Dir

ect

Ass

essm

ent

Met

hod

s CIE

Quiz

Student

s

Three 30 Answer

Scripts 80

%

100

%

90

%

Test Two 60/50

Assignment/Self

-study 2 phases 10/20

Reports /

Record

Books Laboratory Weekly 50

SE

E

Semester End

Examination

End of

every

semester

Consisting

of Part-A

and Part-B

100

Answer

Scripts

20

%

Semester End

Laboratory

End of

every

semester

laboratory

50

Ind

irec

t A

ssess

men

t

met

hod

s

Course End Survey Student

s

End of

course

Questionnair

e

Based on

COs

10%

Note: Individual faculty may adopt various methods for conducting effective quizzes

and evaluate the same. The frequency of quizzes may be more than three also.

CO-PO Mapping

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 M --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

CO2 H H H M --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

CO3 H H M M M --- --- --- --- --- --- L

CO4 H H H M --- --- --- --- --- --- --- L

Low-1Medium-2 High-3

Page 96: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

96

Semester: V

Course Title: DIGITAL DESIGN USING VERILOG

Course Code: 16TE5A1 CIE Marks: 100

Hrs/Week: L:T:P:S: 3:2:0:0 SEE Marks: 100

Credits: 04 SEE Duration: 3Hrs

Course Learning Objectives: The students will be able to

1 Understand different modeling techniques in verilog.

2 Evaluate timing and delays and switch level modeling in verilog

3 Analyze Programming Language Interface and Logic Synthesis with Verilog

4 Discuss different Verification Techniques

UNIT-I

Overview of Digital Design with Verilog HDL

Evolution of CAD, emergence of HDLs, typical HDL-based design flow in HDLs.

Hierarchical Modeling Concepts

Top-down and bottom-up design methodology, differences between modules and

module instances, parts of a simulation, design block, stimulus block.

Basic Concepts, Modules and Ports, Gate-Level Modeling.

09 Hrs

UNIT-II

Dataflow Modeling, Behavioral Modeling

Structured procedures, initial and always, blocking and nonblocking statements,

delay control, generate statement, event control, conditional statements, multiway

branching, loops, sequential and parallel blocks.

Tasks and Functions

Differences between tasks and functions, declaration, invocation, automatic tasks

and functions.

Useful Modeling Techniques

Procedural continuous assignments, overriding parameters, conditional

compilation and execution, useful system tasks.

09 Hrs

UNIT-III

Timing and Delays

Distributed, lumped and pin-to-pin delays, specify blocks, parallel and full

connection, timing checks, delay back-annotation.

Switch-Level Modeling

MOS and CMOS switches, bidirectional switches, modeling of power and ground,

resistive switches, delay specification on switches.

User-Defined Primitives

Parts of UDP, UDP rules, combinational UDPs, sequential UDPs, shorthand

symbols.

09 Hrs

UNIT-IV

Programming Language Interface

Introduction to PLI, uses of PLI, linking and invocation of PLI tasks, conceptual

representation of design, PLI access and utility routines.

Logic Synthesis with Verilog HDL

Introduction to logic synthesis, impact of logic synthesis, Verilog HDL constructs

and operators for logic synthesis, synthesis design flow, verification of

synthesized circuits, modeling tips, design partitioning.

09 Hrs

UNIT-V

Verification Techniques 09 Hrs

Page 97: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

97

Introduction to a simple verification flow, architectural modeling, test vectors/test

benches, simulation acceleration, emulation, analysis/coverage, assertion

checking, formal verification, semi-formal verification, equivalence checking.

Course Outcomes: After completing the course, the students will be able to

1 Describe digital circuits in various HDL programming styles.

2 Analyze switch level modeling and logic synthesis in Verilog.

3 Classify different Verification Techniques and its coverage

4 Implement digital circuits using Verilog programming on FPGA.

Reference Books

1. Samir Palnitkar, “Verilog HDL: A Guide to Digital Design and Synthesis”, Prentice

Hall PTR, 2nd Edition, 2003, ISBN: 0-13-044911-3.

2. J Bhasker, “Verilog HDL Primer”, Bs Publications, 1st Edition, 2008, ISBN-13: 978-

8178001425.

3. Thomas & Moorby, “Verilog Hardware Description Language”, Springer, 5th Edition,

2014, ISBN-13: 978-1475775891.

In case of a course having only theory, the following minimum guidelines may be

followed.

Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE)

( Theory – 100 Marks)

Evaluation method Course with Assignment

Quiz -1 10

Test -1 30

Quiz -2 10

Quiz -3 10

Test -2 30

Assignment 10

Total 100

Semester End Evaluation

Theory (100)

Part- –A

Objective type questions 20

Part –B

There should be five questions from five units. Each question should be for maximum

of 16 Marks.

The UNIT-1, UNIT-4 and UNIT-5 should not have any choice.

The UNIT-2 and UNIT-3 should have an internal choice.

Both the questions should be of the same complexity in terms of COs and Bloom’s

taxonomy level.

80

Total 100

Page 98: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

98

Note: The faculty teaching the course may adapt additional methods for evaluation

within the total maximum marks.

What To

whom

Frequency

of

conductio

n

Max

Mark

s

Evidence Contribution to

Course Outcome

Dir

ect

Ass

essm

ent

Met

hod

s CIE

Quiz

Student

s

Three 30 Answer

Scripts 80

%

100

%

90

%

Test Two 60/50

Assignment/Self

-study 2 phases 10/20

Reports /

Record

Books Laboratory Weekly 50

SE

E

Semester End

Examination

End of

every

semester

Consisting

of Part-A

and Part-B

100

Answer

Scripts

20

%

Semester End

Laboratory

End of

every

semester

laboratory

50

Ind

irec

t A

ssess

men

t

met

hod

s

Course End Survey Student

s

End of

course

Questionnair

e

Based on

COs

10%

Note: Individual faculty may adopt various methods for conducting effective quizzes

and evaluate the same. The frequency of quizzes may be more than three also.

CO-PO Mapping

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 M M H H H M M --- --- --- --- ---

CO2 M M L L M --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

CO3 H H H M M --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

CO4 L M H H H L M --- --- --- --- ---

Low-1Medium-2 High-3

Page 99: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

99

Semester: V

Course Title: CONTROL SYSTEMS

Course Code: 16TE5A2 CIE Marks: 100

Hrs/Week: L:T:P:S: 3:2:0:0 SEE Marks: 100

Credits: 04 SEE Duration: 3Hrs

Course Learning Objectives: The students will be able to

1 Learn the fundamental concepts of Control Systems.

2 Analyze the Time Response and Frequency response of control systems using

Conventional Approach.

3 Perform stability analysis of control systems

4 Design a Stabilized Control systems using Classical Methods.

UNIT-I

Introduction and Modeling of Systems:

The control system, open loop and closed loop control systems. Mathematical

Models of electrical systems.

Transfer functions: Block diagram reduction Technique, Signal Flow Graphs:

Signal Flow graphs, mason’s gain formula (No derivation).

09 Hrs

UNIT-II

Time Response of feedback control systems: Standard test signals, Unit step

response of First and second order systems, Time response specifications of

second order systems, steady – state errors and error constants.

09 Hrs

UNIT-III

Stability analysis: Concepts of stability, Necessary conditions for stability,

Routh- stability criterion, Relative stability analysis.

Root–Locus Techniques: Introduction, The root locus concepts, Construction of

root loci.

09 Hrs

UNIT-IV

Stability in the frequency domain: Mathematical preliminaries, Nyquist stability

criterion (Inverse polar plots excluded). Assessment of relative stability using

Nyquist criterion.

Frequency domain analysis: Introduction, Correlation between time and

frequency response, Bode plots.

09 Hrs

UNIT-V

Introduction to State variable analysis: Concepts of state, state variable and

state models for electrical systems, Solution of state equations loss Concept of

Controllability and observability, Pole placement by state Feedback.

08 Hrs

Course Outcomes: After completing the course, the students will be able to

1 Model the Feedback Control Systems in Integro-Differential Equations and generalize

using Block Diagram and Signal flow graph methods.

2 Analyze the first and second order system for stability due to various input test signals.

3 Describe the stability of the control systems by Classical Methods

4 Evaluate the Dynamic Behavior of Control System using State Space Models.

Reference Books

1. I J Nagrath and M Gopal “Control system Engineering”, New Age International (P) Ltd., 5th

edition 2012, ISBN: 81-224-1192-4.

2. Joseph J Distefano III et al. “Feedback and Control System”, Schaum’s Outlines,

Page 100: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

100

TMH, , 2nd Edition 2007, ISBN-13: 978-0071635127.

3. Benjamin Kuo, Farid Golnaagi ,“Automatic Control Systems”, Wiley Publication,

8th edition, 2009, ISBN-13: 978-0470048962.

In case of a course having only theory, the following minimum guidelines may be

followed.

Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE)

( Theory – 100 Marks)

Evaluation method Course with Assignment

Quiz -1 10

Test -1 30

Quiz -2 10

Quiz -3 10

Test -2 30

Assignment 10

Total 100

Semester End Evaluation

Theory (100)

Part- –A

Objective type questions 20

Part –B

There should be five questions from five units. Each question should be for maximum

of 16 Marks.

The UNIT-1, UNIT-4 and UNIT-5 should not have any choice.

The UNIT-2 and UNIT-3 should have an internal choice.

Both the questions should be of the same complexity in terms of COs and Bloom’s

taxonomy level.

80

Total 100

Note: The faculty teaching the course may adapt additional methods for evaluation

within the total maximum marks.

Page 101: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

101

What To

whom

Frequency

of

conductio

n

Max

Mark

s

Evidence Contribution to

Course Outcome

Dir

ect

Ass

essm

ent

Meth

od

s CIE

Quiz

Student

s

Three 30 Answer

Scripts 80

%

100

%

90

%

Test Two 60/50

Assignment/Self

-study 2 phases 10/20

Reports /

Record

Books Laboratory Weekly 50

SE

E

Semester End

Examination

End of

every

semester

Consisting

of Part-A

and Part-B

100

Answer

Scripts

20

%

Semester End

Laboratory

End of

every

semester

laboratory

50

Ind

irec

t A

ssess

men

t

met

hod

s

Course End Survey Student

s

End of

course

Questionnair

e

Based on

COs

10%

Note: Individual faculty may adopt various methods for conducting effective quizzes

and evaluate the same. The frequency of quizzes may be more than three also.

CO-PO Mapping

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 H --- L M --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

CO2 H --- L M --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

CO3 H M M L M --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

CO4 H M H M M --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

Low-1Medium-2 High-3

Page 102: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

102

Semester: V

Course Title: VIDEO ENGINEERING

Course Code: 16 TE5A3 CIE Marks: 100

Hrs/Week: L:T:P:S: 3:2:0:0 SEE Marks: 100

Credits: 04 SEE Duration: 3Hrs

Course Learning Objectives: The students will be able to

1 Describe the scanning principles used in television

2 Analyze the video broadcasting standards

3 Represent pictures in optical and analogous electrical representation using

appropriate standards.

4 Analyze different video compression and transmission standards.

UNIT-I

Picture and scanning Principle:

Picture Characteristics (Monochrome and Color), Scanning types, Resolution and

Bandwidth. Various standards. Need of synchronization. Building composite

video signals for monochrome. Gamma correction. Characteristics of Human eye,

Trichromatic Coloring , Color triangle, Conversion of color picture to primary

colors, compatibility, Bandwidth requirement, Color difference signals ,

Generation of luminance and chrominance in NTSC, PAL and SECAM.

Differential Phase error and Weighting factor, Encoders and Decoders. Building

Composite Video in Each system. Standard Definition of Composite Video

Parameters.

09 Hrs

UNIT-II

Pickup and Display devices:

Pickup Tubes, MOS and CCDs Working Principle of each and their important

Characteristics, Comparison of different devices. Video- Display Tubes, LCD and

Plasma.

09 Hrs

UNIT-III

Television Application of Video:

Mixing of various video and audio sources. Broadcast Television, Modulation and

Bandwidth requirement. Transmitting system (NTSC, PAL, SECAM)

corresponding Receiving Systems, HDTV & CCTV system.

09 Hrs

UNIT-IV

Digitizing Video:

Advantages of Digital Video, Comparison of analog and digital video. Definition

of Pixel, Pixel Arrays, Different standards used. Sampling of video, Bandwidth

requirement. Sampling luma and chroma. Standards adopted. Need of

compression, Compression strategies. Macro Blocks, Sampling formats.

Composite and Component digital signals, I,B,P frames. Quantization, motion

compensation, Synchronization, Encoding process in H.261, H.263 and MPEG 1.

ATSC and HDTV, HD SDI, Interleaving in HD SDI.

09 Hrs

UNIT-V

Digital recording, Direct to Home TV (Principles and Technology), IPTV. 09 Hrs

Course Outcomes: After completing the course, the students will be able to

1 Explain the characteristics of picture and scanning principles.

Page 103: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

103

2 Analyze composite video signals and receiver front end.

3 Analyze bandwidth requirement, modulation techniques, processing for video

broadcasting.

4 Apply the DVB standards for the design of video system blocks.

Reference Books

1. Dhake A.M.- “Television and Video Engineering”, TMH, 1995, ISBN-13:978-0-07-

460105-1.

2. Keith Jack, “Video Demystified”, 4th Edn, Elsevier, 2007,ISBN:0-7506-7822-4.

3. John Watkinson- “The Art of Digital Video”, Focal press, 4th Edition, 2008, ISBN-0-

240-51586-2.

In case of a course having only theory, the following minimum guidelines may be

followed.

Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE)

( Theory – 100 Marks)

Evaluation method Course with Assignment

Quiz -1 10

Test -1 30

Quiz -2 10

Quiz -3 10

Test -2 30

Assignment 10

Total 100

Semester End Evaluation

Theory (100)

Part- –A

Objective type questions 20

Part –B

There should be five questions from five units. Each question should be for maximum

of 16 Marks.

The UNIT-1, UNIT-4 and UNIT-5 should not have any choice.

The UNIT-2 and UNIT-3 should have an internal choice.

Both the questions should be of the same complexity in terms of COs and Bloom’s

taxonomy level.

80

Total 100

Note: The faculty teaching the course may adapt additional methods for evaluation

within the total maximum marks.

Page 104: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

104

What To

whom

Frequency

of

conductio

n

Max

Mark

s

Evidence Contribution to

Course Outcome

Dir

ect

Ass

essm

ent

Met

hod

s CIE

Quiz

Student

s

Three 30 Answer

Scripts 80

%

100

%

90

%

Test Two 60/50

Assignment/Self

-study 2 phases 10/20

Reports /

Record

Books Laboratory Weekly 50

SE

E

Semester End

Examination

End of

every

semester

Consisting

of Part-A

and Part-B

100

Answer

Scripts

20

%

Semester End

Laboratory

End of

every

semester

laboratory

50

Ind

irec

t A

ssess

men

t

met

hod

s

Course End Survey Student

s

End of

course

Questionnair

e

Based on

COs

10%

Note: Individual faculty may adopt various methods for conducting effective quizzes

and evaluate the same. The frequency of quizzes may be more than three also.

CO-PO Mapping

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 M L --- M --- --- --- --- L M --- L

CO2 --- M --- L M --- --- --- --- M L M

CO3 M L M M M --- --- --- --- --- --- M

CO4 M M H --- L --- --- M --- --- L ---

Low-1Medium-2 High-3

Page 105: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

105

Semester: V

Course Title: COMPUTER ORGANIZATION AND ARCHITECTURE

Course Code: 16TE5A4 CIE Marks: 100

Hrs/Week: L:T:P:S: 3:2:0:0 SEE Marks: 100

Credits: 04 SEE Duration: 3Hrs

Course Learning Objectives: The students will be able to

1 Understand the functions of major components and their organization in a computer.

2 Analyze the various processors, Memory and bus architectures

3 Analyze the algorithms for computational units.

4 Choose an architecture and associated components for a given application

UNIT-I

Basic Structures of Computers , Machine Instructions and Programs: Review of basic Operational concepts - Bus structures , Performance , Processor

clock, Basic Performance equation, Pipelining & Superscalar operation,

Multiprocessor & Multicomputer, General features if CISC & RISC, Big – endian

& Little – endian assignments, Assembler Directives, Stacks & Queues :

Subroutines : Subroutine Nesting.

09 Hrs

UNIT-II

Input/ Output Organization:

Accessing I/O devices, Interrupts, Interrupt Hardware, Enabling & Disabling

Interrupt, Handling Multiple devices, Controlling Device Requests, Exceptions,

Direct Memory Access, Bus Arbitration, Buses - Synchronous Bus, Asynchronous

Bus.

09 Hrs

UNIT-III

The Memory System:

Review of Memory classification, characteristics and basic organization of

memory chips. Static Memories, Asynchronous DRAMs, Synchronous DRAMs,

Organization of Larger Memories, Memory System Considerations, Rambus

memory; Cache Memories - Mapping functions, Performance considerations,

Interleaving, Hit Rate & Miss Penalty, Virtual Memories - Address Translation.

09 Hrs

UNIT-IV

Arithmetic unit:

Implementation of Addition & Subtraction of Signed Numbers: Design of fast

adders - Carry-Look ahead Addition; Multiplication of positive numbers - Signed

– Operand Multiplication, Booth Algorithm, Fast Multiplication, Bit-pair

Recoding of Multipliers; Integer division , Floating – Point Numbers &

Operations.

09 Hrs

UNIT-V

Advanced Processor Architecture: Introduction to Advanced Architecture,

ARM, SHARC, Tiger SHARC, DSP, Architecture of DSP, Processor and memory

organizations, instruction level parallelism.

09Hrs

Course Outcomes: After completing the course, the students will be able to

1 Describe the basic architecture and operational concepts involved in computer system

design.

2 Identify the memory and bus structure requirements for a given system design.

Page 106: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

106

3 Apply the appropriate algorithms for mathematical operations.

4 Choose the appropriate processor for a particular application

Reference Books

1. Carl Hamacher, Z Vranesic& S Zaky, “Computer organization”, 5th Edition, Tata

McGraw- Hill, 5th Reprint , 2012 ISBN 10: 1259005275.

2. Morris Mano, “Computer System Architecture”, 3nd Edition, PHI, 1992, ISBN :978-

0131755635

3. Raj Kamal, “Embedded Systems Architecture Programming and Design”, Tata

McGraw Hill, 5th Reprint, 2005. ISBN-10: 933290149X

In case of a course having only theory, the following minimum guidelines may be

followed.

Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE)

( Theory – 100 Marks)

Evaluation method Course with Assignment

Quiz -1 10

Test -1 30

Quiz -2 10

Quiz -3 10

Test -2 30

Assignment 10

Total 100

Semester End Evaluation

Theory (100)

Part- –A

Objective type questions 20

Part –B

There should be five questions from five units. Each question should be for maximum

of 16 Marks.

The UNIT-1, UNIT-4 and UNIT-5 should not have any choice.

The UNIT-2 and UNIT-3 should have an internal choice.

Both the questions should be of the same complexity in terms of COs and Bloom’s

taxonomy level.

80

Total 100

Note: The faculty teaching the course may adapt additional methods for evaluation

within the total maximum marks.

Page 107: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

107

What To

whom

Frequency

of

conductio

n

Max

Mark

s

Evidence Contribution to

Course Outcome

Dir

ect

Ass

essm

ent

Met

hod

s CIE

Quiz

Student

s

Three 30 Answer

Scripts 80

%

100

%

90

%

Test Two 60/50

Assignment/Self

-study 2 phases 10/20

Reports /

Record

Books Laboratory Weekly 50

SE

E

Semester End

Examination

End of

every

semester

Consisting

of Part-A

and Part-B

100

Answer

Scripts

20

%

Semester End

Laboratory

End of

every

semester

laboratory

50

Ind

irec

t A

ssess

men

t

met

hod

s

Course End Survey Student

s

End of

course

Questionnair

e

Based on

COs

10%

Note: Individual faculty may adopt various methods for conducting effective quizzes

and evaluate the same. The frequency of quizzes may be more than three also.

CO-PO Mapping

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 L L L --- --- --- L --- L L --- L

CO2 M M L --- --- --- L --- L M --- M

CO3 M M --- --- --- --- L --- L M --- M

CO4 M M M M --- --- L --- M M --- M

Low-1Medium-2 High-3

Page 108: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

108

Semester: V

TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS

Course Code: 16GE5BXX CIE Marks: 100

Hrs/Week: L:T:P:S: 3:0:0:4 SEE Marks: 100

Credits: 04 SEE Duration: 3Hrs

Course Learning Objectives: The students will be able to

1 Represent schematic of communication system and identify its components

2 Classify satellite orbits and sub-systems for communication.

3 Analyze different telecommunication services, systems and principles.

4 Explain the role of optical communication system and its components.

5 Describe the features of wireless technologies and standards

UNIT-I

Introduction to Electronic Communication

The Significance of Human Communication, Communication Systems, Types of

Electronic Communication, Modulation and Multiplexing, Electromagnetic

Spectrum, Bandwidth, A Survey of Communication Applications.

The Fundamentals of Electronics: Gain, Attenuation, and Decibels.

Radio Receivers: TRF, Super heterodyne receiver, Frequency conversions,

Intermediate and Image Frequency.

08Hrs

UNIT-II

Modulation Schemes:

Analog Modulation: AM, FM and PM- brief review.

Digital Modulation: PCM, Line Codes, ASK, FSK, PSK, and QAM.

Wideband Modulation: Spread spectrum, FHSS, DSSS.

Telephone and Cable Modems.

Multiplexing and Multiple Access Techniques:

Frequency division multiplexing, Time division multiplexing,

Multiple Access: FDMA, TDMA, CDMA, Duplexing.

08 Hrs

UNIT-III

Satellite Communication:

Satellite Orbits, Satellite Communication Systems, Satellite Subsystems, Ground

Stations, Satellite Applications, Global Positioning System.

08 Hrs

UNIT-IV

Optical Communication: Optical Principles, Optical Communication Systems,

Fiber-Optic Cables, Optical Transmitters and Receivers, Wavelength-Division

Multiplexing, Passive Optical Networks.

08 Hrs

UNIT-V

Cell Phone Technologies: Cellular concepts, Frequency allocation, Frequency

reuse. Advanced Mobile Phone System (AMPS)

Digital Cell Phone Systems: 2 G, 2.5 G, 3G and 4G cell phone systems,

Advanced Cell Phones.

Wireless Technologies: Wireless LAN, PANs and Bluetooth, ZigBee and Mesh

Wireless Networks, WiMAX and Wireless Metropolitan-Area Networks.

08 Hrs

Course Outcomes: After completing the course, the students will be able to

1 Describe the basics of communication systems.

Page 109: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

109

2 Analyze the importance of modulation and multiple access schemes for communication

systems.

3 Compare different telecommunication generations, wired and wireless communication.

4 Justify the use of different components and sub-system in advanced communication

systems.

Reference Books

1. Louis E. Frenzel, “Principles of Electronic Communication Systems”, Tata McGraw

Hill 3rdEdition 2008, ISBN: 978-0-07-310704-2.

2. Roy Blake, “Electronic Communication Systems”, Thomson/Delamar, 2nd edition,

2002, ISB: 978-81-315-0307-2.

3. George Kennedy, “Electronic Communication Systems”, Tata McGraw Hill

3rdEdition 2008, ISBN: 0-02-800592-9.

4. Anu A. Gokhale “Introduction to Telecommunications”, Cengage Learning,

2ndEdition 2008, ISBN: 981-240-081-8.

In case of a course having only theory, the following minimum guidelines may be

followed.

Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE)

( Theory – 100 Marks)

Evaluation method Course with Self Study

Quiz -1 10

Test -1 25

Quiz -2 10

Quiz -3 10

Test -2 25

Self Study[EL] 20

Total 100

Semester End Evaluation

Theory (100)

Part- –A

Objective type questions 20

Part –B

There should be five questions from five units. Each question should be for maximum

of 16 Marks.

The UNIT-1, UNIT-4 and UNIT-5 should not have any choice.

The UNIT-2 and UNIT-3 should have an internal choice.

Both the questions should be of the same complexity in terms of COs and Bloom’s

taxonomy level.

80

Total 100

Note: The faculty teaching the course may adapt additional methods for evaluation

within the total maximum marks.

Page 110: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

110

What To

whom

Frequency

of

conductio

n

Max

Mark

s

Evidence Contribution to

Course Outcome

Dir

ect

Ass

essm

ent

Met

hod

s CIE

Quiz

Student

s

Three 30 Answer

Scripts 80

%

100

%

90

%

Test Two 60/50

Assignment/Self

-study 2 phases 10/20

Reports /

Record

Books Laboratory Weekly 50

SE

E

Semester End

Examination

End of

every

semester

Consisting

of Part-A

and Part-B

100

Answer

Scripts

20

%

Semester End

Laboratory

End of

every

semester

laboratory

50

Ind

irec

t A

ssess

men

t

met

hod

s

Course End Survey Student

s

End of

course

Questionnair

e

Based on

COs

10%

Note: Individual faculty may adopt various methods for conducting effective quizzes

and evaluate the same. The frequency of quizzes may be more than three also.

CO-PO Mapping

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 L L L M M --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

CO2 L L L M L --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

CO3 L L L H H --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

CO4 L --- L H H --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

Low-1Medium-2 High-3

Page 111: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

111

Semester:VI

Course Title: FOUNDATIONS OF MANAGEMENT & ECONOMICS

Course Code: 16HEM61 CIE Marks: 50

Hrs/Week: L:T:P:S: 2:0:0:0 SEE Marks: 50

Credits: 02 SEE Duration: 1.5 Hrs

Course Learning Objectives: The students will be able to

1 Understand the evolution of management thought.

2 Acquire knowledge of the functions of Management.

3 Gain basic knowledge of essentials of Micro economics and Macro economics.

UNIT-I

Introduction to Management: Management Functions, Roles & Skills,

Management History – Classical Approach: Scientific Management &

Administrative Theory, Quantitative Approach: Operations Research, Behavioral

Approach: Hawthorne Studies, Contemporary Approach: Systems & Contingency

Theory.

03 Hrs

UNIT-II

Foundations of Planning: Types of Goals & Plans, Approaches to Setting Goals

& Plans, Strategic Management Process, Corporate & Competitive Strategies.

Organizational Structure & Design: Overview of Designing Organizational

Structure: Work Specialization, Departmentalization, Chain of Command, Span of

Control, Centralization & Decentralization, Formalization, Mechanistic & Organic

Structures.

04 Hrs

UNIT-III

Motivating Employees: Early Theories of Motivation: Maslow’s Hierarchy of

Needs Theory, McGregor’s Theory X & Theory Y, Herzberg’s Two Factor

Theory, Contemporary Theories of Motivation: Adam’s Equity & Vroom’s

Expectancy Theory.

Managers as Leaders: Behavioral Theories: Ohio State & University of

Michigan Studies, Blake & Mouton’s Managerial Grid, Contingency Theories of

Leadership: Hersey & Blanchard’s Situational Leadership, Contemporary Views

of Leadership: Transactional & Transformational Leadership.

05 Hrs

UNIT-IV

Introduction to Economics: Concept of Economy and its working, basic

problems of an Economy, Market mechanism to solve economic problems,

Government and the economy,

Essentials of Micro Economics: Concept and scope, tools of Microeconomics,

themes of microeconomics, Decisions: some central themes, Markets: Some

central themes, Uses of Microeconomics.

Hrs

UNIT-V

Essentials of Macroeconomics: Prices and inflation, Exchange rate, Gross

domestic product(GDP) , components of GDP, the Labor Market, Money and

banks, Interest rate, Macroeconomic models- an overview, Growth theory, The

classical model, Keynesian cross model, IS-LM-model, The AS-AD-model, The

complete Keynesian model, The neo-classical synthesis, Exchange rate

determination and the Mundell-Fleming model

Hrs

Page 112: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

112

Course Outcomes: After completing the course, the students will be able to

1 Explain the principles of management theory & recognize the characteristics of an

organization.

2 Demonstrate the importance of key performance areas in strategic management and

design appropriate organizational structures and possess an ability to conceive various

organizational dynamics.

3 Select & Implement the right leadership practices in organizations that would enable

systems orientation.

4 Understand the basic concepts and principles of Micro economics and Macroeconomics.

Reference Books

1. Stephen Robbins, Mary Coulter & Neharika Vohra, “Management, Pearson Education

Publications, 10th Edition, ISBN: 978-81-317-2720-1.

2. James Stoner, Edward Freeman & Daniel Gilbert Jr, Management, PHI, 6th Edition,

ISBN: 81-203-0981-2.

3. Douglas Bernheim B & Michael D Whinston, Microeconomics,TMH Pub.Co.Ltd,

2009 Edition, ISBN: 13:978-0-07-008056-0.

4. Dwivedi.D.N, Macroeconomics: Theory and Policy, McGraw Hill Education; 3rd

Edition,2010,ISBN-13: 978-0070091450.

5. Peter Jochumzen, Essentials of Macroeconomics, e-book(www.bookboon.com), 1st

Edition., 2010, ISBN:978-87-7681-558-5.

In case of a course having only theory, the following minimum guidelines may be

followed.

Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE)

( Theory – 100 Marks)

Evaluation method Course with Assignment

Quiz -1 05

Test -1 15

Quiz -2 05

Quiz -3 05

Test -2 15

Assignment 05

Total 50

Semester End Evaluation

Theory (50)

Part- –A

Objective type questions 10

Part –B

There should be five questions from five units. Each question should be for maximum

of 16 Marks.

The UNIT-1, UNIT-4 and UNIT-5 should not have any choice.

Page 113: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

113

The UNIT-2 and UNIT-3 should have an internal choice.

Both the questions should be of the same complexity in terms of COs and Bloom’s

taxonomy level.

40

Total 50

Note: The faculty teaching the course may adapt additional methods for evaluation

within the total maximum marks.

What To

whom

Frequency

of

conductio

n

Max

Mark

s

Evidence Contribution to

Course Outcome

Dir

ect

Ass

essm

ent

Met

hod

s CIE

Quiz

Student

s

Three 30 Answer

Scripts 80

%

100

%

90

%

Test Two 60/50

Assignment/Self

-study 2 phases 10/20

Reports /

Record

Books Laboratory Weekly 50

SE

E

Semester End

Examination

End of

every

semester

Consisting

of Part-A

and Part-B

100

Answer

Scripts

20

%

Semester End

Laboratory

End of

every

semester

laboratory

50

Ind

irec

t A

ssess

men

t

met

hod

s

Course End Survey Student

s

End of

course

Questionnair

e

Based on

COs

10%

Note: Individual faculty may adopt various methods for conducting effective quizzes

and evaluate the same. The frequency of quizzes may be more than three also.

CO-PO Mapping

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 --- M --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

CO2 --- --- M --- --- --- --- --- H M L ---

CO3 --- --- --- --- --- M L --- --- --- L ---

CO4 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

Low-1Medium-2 High-3

Page 114: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

114

Semester: VI

Course Title: COMPUTER COMMUNICATION NETWORKS

Course Code: 16TE62 CIE Marks: 100+50=150

Hrs/Week: L:T:P:S: 4:0:2:0 SEE Marks: 100+50=150

Credits: 05 SEE Duration: 3Hrs+3Hrs

Course Learning Objectives: The students will be able to

1 Explain the concepts of networks and how communication takes place between

computers and networks using OSI reference model and TCP/IP model.

2 Apply fundamentals of Digital Communications and switching systems.

3 Analyze flow control, congestion control and QOS of the network for reliable data

transfer.

4 Implement and Evaluate various protocols at Link, Network, Transport layer and

Application layer

UNIT-I

Introduction:

Overview Of The Internet: Networks, Switching, The Internet, Accessing the

Internet, Hardware and Software.

Protocol Layering: Scenarios, TCP/IP Protocol Suite, The OSI Model.

Physical layer & transmission media :

Data And Signals: Analog and Digital, Transmission Impairment, Data Rate

Limits, Performance.

Bandwidth Utilization: Multiplexing, Spread Spectrum.

Transmission Media: Guided Media, Unguided Media.

09 Hrs

UNIT II

Data-Link Layer:Wired Networks

Introduction: Nodes and Links, Two Types of Links , Two Sublayers.

Data Link Control (DLC): Framing, Flow and Error Control, Error Detection and

Correction, Two DLC Protocols.

Multiple Access Protocols: Random Access, Controlled Access,

Channelization,Link Layer Addressing.

Wired Lans: Ethernet Protocol

IEEE project 802, Standard Ethernet, Fast Ethernet (100 Mbps), Gigabit Ethernet,

Virtual LANs.

09Hrs

UNIT III

Network Layer :

Introduction: Network-Layer Services, Packet Switching, Network-Layer

Performance, Network-Layer Congestion, Structure of a Router.

Network-Layer Protocols: IPv4 Datagram Format, IPv4 Addresses, Forwarding of

IP Packets, ICMPv4.

Unicast Routing: General Idea, Routing Algorithms, Unicast Routing Protocols.

Multicast Routing: Introduction, Multicasting Basics, Intradomain Routing

Protocols, Interdomain Routing Protocols.

09Hrs

UNIT IV

Transport Layer:

Introduction : Transport-Layer Services

Transport-Layer Protocols : Simple Protocol, Stop-and-Wait Protocol, Go-Back-N

09 Hrs

Page 115: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

115

Protocol(GBN), Selective-Repeat Protocol, Bidirectional Protocols:

Piggybacking, Internet Transport-Layer Protocols.

User Datagram Protocol (UDP): User Datagram, UDP Services, UDP

Applications.

Transmission Control Protocol (TCP):TCP Services , TCP Features, Segment, A

TCP Connection , State Transition Diagram, Windows in TCP, Flow Control,

Error Control, TCP Congestion Control, TCP Timers , Options.

UNIT V

Application Layer:

Introduction: Providing Services , Application-Layer Paradigms.

Client-Server Paradigm: Application Programming Interface, Using Services of

the Transport Layer.

Standard Client-Server Applications : World Wide Web and HTTP , FTP ,

Electronic Mail , TELNET , Secure Shell (SSH) , Domain Name System (DNS).

Peer-To-Peer Paradigm : P2P Networks, Distributed Hash Table(DHT)

09 Hrs

Laboratory Experiments

Part- A

Experiments Using Routers and Switches:

Configuration of Cisco router, Cisco switch , IP static routing and RIP using Cisco router,

and VLAN using Cisco switch.

Part- B

Experiments Using Qualnet

Experiments on FTP, Telnet, IEEE 802.3 and IEEE 802.11.

Part-C

Programs based on implementation of various algorithm using C/C++. 1. Program for error detecting code using CRC-CCITT (16-bits).

2. Shortest Path algorithm to find suitable path for transmission.

3. Spanning Tree algorithm to find loop less path.

4. Implement a client and server communication using sockets programming.

5. Message queues of FIFOs as IPC Channel.

6. Implementation of congestion control algorithm.

7. Implement a simple multicast routing mechanism.

Course Outcomes: After completing the course, the students will be able to

1 Identify the functions of different layers in the network models.

2 Analyze various protocols and algorithms in the network model.

3 Design and Implement protocols and algorithms for computer networks.

4 Evaluate the performance parameters of networks models.

Reference Books

1. Behrouz A. Forouzan, FirouzMosharraf, “Computer Networks- A Top-Down

Approach”, McGraw Hill Publishers, Special Indian edition 2012, ISBN-13: 978-1-

25-900156-7.

2. Andrew S. Tanenbaum, “Computer networks”,Prentice hall,5th edition, ISBN-13: 978-

0-13-212695-3.

Page 116: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

116

In case of a course having both Theory & Lab, the following minimum guidelines may

be followed

Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE)

( Theory – 100 Marks) (Laboratory- 50 Marks) Total

(150) Evaluation method Course with

assignment

Quiz -1 10 Performance of the student in

the laboratory, every week 40

150

Test -1 30

Quiz -2 10

Quiz -3 10 Test at the end of the semester 10

Test -2 30

Assignments 10

Total

50 Total 100

Semester End Evaluation (SEE)

Theory (100 Marks) Laboratory(50 Marks) Total

(150)

Part- –A

Objective type questions

20 Experiment

Conduction with

proper results

40

150

Part –B

There should be five questions from five units.

Each question should be for maximum of 16

Marks.

The UNIT-1, UNIT-4 and UNIT-5 should not

have any choice.

The UNIT-2 and UNIT-3 should have an internal

choice.

Both the questions should be of the same

complexity in terms of COs and Bloom’s

taxonomy level.

80

Viva 10

Total

50 Total 100

Page 117: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

117

What To

whom

Frequency

of

conductio

n

Max

Mark

s

Evidence Contribution to

Course Outcome

Dir

ect

Ass

essm

ent

Met

hod

s CIE

Quiz

Student

s

Three 30 Answer

Scripts 80

%

100

%

90

%

Test Two 60/50

Assignment/Self

-study 2 phases 10/20

Reports /

Record

Books Laboratory Weekly 50

SE

E

Semester End

Examination

End of

every

semester

Consisting

of Part-A

and Part-B

100

Answer

Scripts

20

%

Semester End

Laboratory

End of

every

semester

laboratory

50

Ind

irec

t A

ssess

men

t

met

hod

s

Course End Survey Student

s

End of

course

Questionnair

e

Based on

COs

10%

Note: Individual faculty may adopt various methods for conducting effective quizzes

and evaluate the same. The frequency of quizzes may be more than three also.

CO-PO Mapping

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 L M M M --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

CO2 M M M M M M --- --- M --- --- ---

CO3 M H H H M M --- --- M --- --- ---

CO4 H H H H M M --- --- M --- --- ---

Low-1Medium-2 High-3

Page 118: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

118

Semester: VI

Course Title: INFORMATION THEORY & CODING

Course Code: 16TE63 CIE Marks: 100

Hrs/Week: L:T:P:S: 3:2:0:0 SEE Marks: 100

Credits: 04 SEE Duration: 3Hrs

Course Learning Objectives: The students will be able to

1 Understand the need for Source coding and Channel coding in Communication systems.

2 Apply the Shannon’s theorem for the performance analysis.

3 Analyze various Error control coding techniques.

UNIT-I

Definitions of probability, Joint and conditional probabilities, Total probability

and Bayes theorems, Independent Events.

Measure of Information, Units of Information, Discrete memory less source

(DMS) and Entropy, Logarithmic inequalities, Properties of Entropy, Information

Rate, Extension of a zero memory source, Sources with finite memory - Markov

sources, Extension of a Markov Source.

09 Hrs

UNIT-II

Source Encoding:

Source coding Theorem, Huffman coding, Discrete memory less channels, Mutual

Information, Channel Capacity, Channel coding theorem, Differential Entropy and

mutual Information for continuous ensembles, Channel Capacity theorem.

09 Hrs

UNIT-III

Error Control Coding: Rationale for Coding, Types of Codes, Discrete memory

less channel,

Linear Block codes: Repetition codes, Syndrome decoding, Minimum Distance

Considerations, Hamming Codes.

Cyclic Codes: Generator Polynomial, Generator Matrix, Encoder, Syndrome

Calculation;

Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) codes, Maximum Length codes, Golay codes,

Bose- Chaudhury- Hocquenghem (BCH) Codes, Reed-Solomon Codes.

09 Hrs

UNIT-IV

Convolution Codes: Convolution Encoding – Time domain approach, Transform

Domain Approach, State, Tree and Trellis diagrams, Decoding of Convolution

Codes using Viterbi algorithm.

09 Hrs

UNIT-V

Distance Properties of Convolution codes, Sequential Decoding of Convolution

Codes, Trellis Codes, Applications of Error-control Coding, Turbo Codes. 09 Hrs

Course Outcomes: After completing the course, the students will be able to

1 Explain the importance of source coding and channel coding in digital communication.

2 Apply various source coding technique to reduce redundancy.

3 Analyze the source coding and channel coding requirements.

4 Design the source/convolution coding and decoding schemes.

Reference Books

1. Simon Haykin, “An Introduction to Analog & Digital Communications”, John Wiley,

Page 119: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

119

2nd Edition, 2002. ISBN: 9788126536535

2. Simon Haykin, “Communication Systems”, John Wiley, 4th Edition, 2001, ISBN:

0471178691 / 9780471178699

3. H.P. Hsu, “Analog and Digital Communications”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2nd Edition,

2006. ISBN: 0071402284 / 9780071402286

In case of a course having only theory, the following minimum guidelines may be

followed.

Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE)

( Theory – 100 Marks)

Evaluation method Course with Assignment

Quiz -1 10

Test -1 30

Quiz -2 10

Quiz -3 10

Test -2 30

Assignment 10

Total 100

Semester End Evaluation

Theory (100)

Part- –A

Objective type questions 20

Part –B

There should be five questions from five units. Each question should be for maximum

of 16 Marks.

The UNIT-1, UNIT-4 and UNIT-5 should not have any choice.

The UNIT-2 and UNIT-3 should have an internal choice.

Both the questions should be of the same complexity in terms of COs and Bloom’s

taxonomy level.

80

Total 100

Note: The faculty teaching the course may adapt additional methods for evaluation

within the total maximum marks.

Page 120: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

120

What To

whom

Frequency

of

conductio

n

Max

Mark

s

Evidence Contribution to

Course Outcome

Dir

ect

Ass

essm

ent

Met

hod

s CIE

Quiz

Student

s

Three 30 Answer

Scripts 80

%

100

%

90

%

Test Two 60/50

Assignment/Self

-study 2 phases 10/20

Reports /

Record

Books Laboratory Weekly 50

SE

E

Semester End

Examination

End of

every

semester

Consisting

of Part-A

and Part-B

100

Answer

Scripts

20

%

Semester End

Laboratory

End of

every

semester

laboratory

50

Ind

irec

t A

ssess

men

t

met

hod

s

Course End Survey Student

s

End of

course

Questionnair

e

Based on

COs

10%

Note: Individual faculty may adopt various methods for conducting effective quizzes

and evaluate the same. The frequency of quizzes may be more than three also.

CO-PO Mapping

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 H --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- L --- M

CO2 M --- M --- H --- --- --- --- M M M

CO3 L M L H --- --- --- --- --- --- --- M

CO4 H H M M H --- --- --- --- L L M

Low-1Medium-2 High-3

Page 121: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

121

Semester: VI

Course Title: RADIATING SYSTEMS

Course Code: 16TE64 CIE Marks: 100+50=150

Hrs/Week: L:T:P:S: 3:0:2:4 SEE Marks: 100+50=150

Credits: 05 SEE Duration: 3Hrs+3Hrs

Course Learning Objectives: The students will be able to

1 Learn the fundamental concepts of antenna design.

2 Analyze and Design the antenna for various applications

3 Employ concept of Beam forming in Smart antenna design

4 Characterize the waveguide and micro strip components and evaluate their

performance.

UNIT-I

Antenna Basics:

Basic antenna parameters, Radiation patterns, Radiation Intensity, Beam area,

Beam Efficiency, Directivity and Gain, Aperture antennas, Fields from oscillating

electric Dipole with mathematical derivations, Antenna field zones, Shape-

impedance, Power theorem & its applications, Radiation intensity, Power patterns,

Examples of Power patterns. Electric dipole-fields of short dipole, radiation

resistance of short and half wave dipole.

08 Hrs

UNIT-II

Antenna arrays:

Field patterns, Phase patterns of Point sources, Arrays of two isotropic point

sources, Arrays of Non-isotropic sources, Pattern multiplication and synthesis,

Array of n-isotropic point sources with equal amplitude and spacing, Broadside ,

End fire arrays & Extended end-fire arrays, dipole arrays with parasitic elements,

Yagi-Uda array.

08Hrs

UNIT-III

Types of Antennas:

Microwave antennas- Rectangular Horn antenna and its radiation characteristics,

Parabolic antenna-General properties, Paraboloidal reflector, Feed methods for

parabololic reflectors. Broadband antennas- Helical antenna geometry and its

modes, Practical considerations for the monofilar Axial-mode Helical antenna.

Broadband basics, Rumsey’s Principle, Log-Periodic Antenna.

08 Hrs

UNIT-IV

Smart Antenna Configurations, Switch Beam Antennas, Adaptive Antenna

Approach , Space Division multiple access , Architectures of smart antennas,

Benefits and drawbacks , Basic Principles, Mutual Coupling Effects, Antennas for

terrestrial mobile communication systems(Base station Antennas)

08 Hrs

UNIT-V

Microstrip Antenna:

Introduction, Advantages and Limitations, Rectangular Microstrip antennas,

feeding methods, Characteristics of Microstrip Antennas, Impact of Different

parameters on Characteristics, brief method of analysis - Transmission line model,

Printed Antennas for handheld applications.

08 Hrs

Laboratory Experiments

Students are expected to implement the following circuits on Microwave Benches

Page 122: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

122

1. Characterization of Reflex Klystron, Gunn diode sources

2. Characterization of Directional Coupler, Tee junctions, Circulator and Isolator,

3. Horn antenna, Parabolic Dish, Micro strip antennas,

4. Microstrip Passive components

The students are expected to simulate the following Antennas using RF CAD tools

1. Radiation characteristics of Dipole antenna,

2. N- isotropic point source array,

3. Rectangular Microstrip patch antenna

Course Outcomes: After completing the course, the students will be able to

1 Define the performance parameters for Antennas.

2 Identify antennas for different frequency applications

3 Analyze array antenna for different patterns.

4 Design and implement Antennas for required radiation characteristics

Reference Books

1. John D. Kraus & Ronald J. Marhefka, “Antennas”, Mc Graw Hill, 4th edition; 2011,

ISBN -0-07-060185-2.

2. Constantine A Balanis-“Antenna Theory”, John Wiley & Sons, 2nd edition, 2005,

ISBN – 9971-51-233-5.

3. Constantine A Balanis , Bannides “ Introduction to Smart Antennas” 2007, ISBN:

1598291769

Page 123: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

123

In case of a course having both Theory & Lab, the following minimum guidelines may

be followed

Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE)

( Theory – 100 Marks) (Laboratory- 50 Marks) Total

(150) Evaluation method Course with Self

Study

Quiz -1 10 Performance of the student in

the laboratory, every week 40

150

Test -1 25

Quiz -2 10

Quiz -3 10 Test at the end of the semester 10

Test -2 25

Self Study 20

Total

50 Total 100

Semester End Evaluation (SEE)

Theory (100 Marks) Laboratory(50 Marks) Total

(150)

Part- –A

Objective type questions

20 Experiment

Conduction with

proper results

40

150

Part –B

There should be five questions from five units.

Each question should be for maximum of 16

Marks.

The UNIT-1, UNIT-4 and UNIT-5 should not

have any choice.

The UNIT-2 and UNIT-3 should have an internal

choice.

Both the questions should be of the same

complexity in terms of COs and Bloom’s

taxonomy level.

80

Viva 10

Total

50 Total 100

Page 124: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

124

What To

whom

Frequency

of

conductio

n

Max

Mark

s

Evidence Contribution to

Course Outcome

Dir

ect

Ass

essm

ent

Met

hod

s CIE

Quiz

Student

s

Three 30 Answer

Scripts 80

%

100

%

90

%

Test Two 60/50

Assignment/Self

-study 2 phases 10/20

Reports /

Record

Books Laboratory Weekly 50

SE

E

Semester End

Examination

End of

every

semester

Consisting

of Part-A

and Part-B

100

Answer

Scripts

20

%

Semester End

Laboratory

End of

every

semester

laboratory

50

Ind

irec

t A

ssess

men

t

met

hod

s

Course End Survey Student

s

End of

course

Questionnair

e

Based on

COs

10%

Note: Individual faculty may adopt various methods for conducting effective quizzes

and evaluate the same. The frequency of quizzes may be more than three also.

CO-PO Mapping

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 M L L L --- --- --- --- --- --- --- L

CO2 M M L L --- --- --- --- --- --- --- L

CO3 M M M L --- --- --- --- --- --- --- M

CO4 M M M M --- --- --- --- --- --- --- M

Low-1Medium-2 High-3

Page 125: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

125

Semester: VI

Course Title: CMOS CIRCUIT DESIGN

Course Code: 16TE6C1 CIE Marks: 100

Hrs/Week: L:T:P:S: 3:2:0:0 SEE Marks: 100

Credits: 04 SEE Duration: 3Hrs

Course Learning Objectives: The students will be able to

1 Define the structure of MOS transistors and explain geometrical effects of a MOSFET.

2 Draw stick diagram and corresponding layout for a given digital circuit.

3 Analyze design steps involved in digital design and explain the need for low power in

IC design.

4 Evaluate the circuit reliability and signal integrity issues in DSM IC design.

UNIT-I

Review of MOS transistor: MOSFET operations,MOS current equation, Back-

bias effect.

Physical and geometrical effects on the behavior of the MOS transistor:

Back-bias effect, Zero field mobility, Carrier mobility degradation, Channel

length modulation, Punch through, Hot carrier effects, and Weak inversion

behavior.

09 Hrs

UNIT-II

CMOS circuits:

Electrical design of CMOS circuits: CMOS inverter, Dissipation of a CMOS

inverter, CMOS Buffer design, Noise margins, Digital CMOS circuits: pass

transistor logic, Static CMOS circuits, Clocked static CMOS circuits, Dynamic

CMOS circuits, Choosing a CMOS implementation, Clocking strategies.

09 Hrs

UNIT-III

Fabrication: Basic fabrication operations, nMOS process steps.

CMOS Fabrication: n-well, p-well, twin-tub, Latch-up in CMOS.

VLSI Layout: MOS layer, Stick diagrams, Layout design rules, Layout diagrams

for Boolean equations.

09 Hrs

UNIT-IV

VLSI and ASICs: Introduction, Abstraction levels for VLSI, Digital VLSI

Design.

Low power IC design: Sources of CMOS power consumption, Technology

options for low power, Design options for low power (excluding topics from

capacitance reduction).

09 Hrs

UNIT-V

Circuit Reliability: Introduction, Design for Reliability: Introduction, Latch-up in

CMOS circuits, ESD and its protection Electromigration, Hot-carrier degradation.

Signal Integrity:Introduction, Clock distribution and critical timing issues, Clock

generation and synchronization in different domains on a chip.

Testing, Yield, Packaging categories.

09 Hrs

Course Outcomes: After completing the course, the students will be able to

1 Apply the fundamentals of semiconductor physics in MOS transistors.

2 Analyze VLSI fabrication flow involved in IC design and create layouts for Boolean

functions.

Page 126: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

126

3 Justify the need for low power, circuit reliability and signal integrity in IC design.

4 Design digital circuits for Boolean functions and realize them in variants ofCMOS logic

Reference Books

1. Harry Veendrick, “Deep-Submicron CMOS ICs”, 2ndEdition, Kluwer academic

publishers, 2000, ISBN: 9044001116.

2. Douglas A. Pucknell and Kamran Eshraghian, “Basic VLSI Design”, PHI, 3rd edition,

2003, ISBN: 8120309863.

3. Sung-Mo Kang and Yusuf Leblebici, “CMOS Digital Integrated Circuits: Analysis

and Design”, 3rd edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, ISBN: 0070530777, 2003.

In case of a course having only theory, the following minimum guidelines may be

followed.

Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE)

( Theory – 100 Marks)

Evaluation method Course with Assignment

Quiz -1 10

Test -1 30

Quiz -2 10

Quiz -3 10

Test -2 30

Assignment 10

Total 100

Semester End Evaluation

Theory (100)

Part- –A

Objective type questions 20

Part –B

There should be five questions from five units. Each question should be for maximum

of 16 Marks.

The UNIT-1, UNIT-4 and UNIT-5 should not have any choice.

The UNIT-2 and UNIT-3 should have an internal choice.

Both the questions should be of the same complexity in terms of COs and Bloom’s

taxonomy level.

80

Total 100

Note: The faculty teaching the course may adapt additional methods for evaluation

within the total maximum marks.

Page 127: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

127

What To

whom

Frequency

of

conductio

n

Max

Mark

s

Evidence Contribution to

Course Outcome

Dir

ect

Ass

essm

ent

Met

hod

s CIE

Quiz

Student

s

Three 30 Answer

Scripts 80

%

100

%

90

%

Test Two 60/50

Assignment/Self

-study 2 phases 10/20

Reports /

Record

Books Laboratory Weekly 50

SE

E

Semester End

Examination

End of

every

semester

Consisting

of Part-A

and Part-B

100

Answer

Scripts

20

%

Semester End

Laboratory

End of

every

semester

laboratory

50

Ind

irec

t A

ssess

men

t

met

hod

s

Course End Survey Student

s

End of

course

Questionnair

e

Based on

COs

10%

Note: Individual faculty may adopt various methods for conducting effective quizzes

and evaluate the same. The frequency of quizzes may be more than three also.

CO-PO Mapping

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 M L L M M --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

CO2 --- L --- M H --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

CO3 M L L M M --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

CO4 L --- L H H --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

Low-1Medium-2 High-3

Page 128: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

128

Semester: VI

Course Title: ARM PROCESSOR

Course Code: 16TE6C2 CIE Marks: 100

Hrs/Week: L:T:P:S: 3:2:0:0 SEE Marks: 100

Credits: 04 SEE Duration: 3Hrs

Course Learning Objectives: The students will be able to

1 Describe basic architecture and operations of arm processors.

2 Explain Thumb instruction set for programming.

3 Design an embedded system using ARM processor.

4 Analyze the working principles of the cross compilers and Vxworks operating systems

UNIT-I

ARM embedded systems: ARM Architecture. ARM processor fundamentals:

Registers, current program status register, pipeline, exceptions, interrupts and

vector table, core extensions, Architecture revisions, ARM processor families.

Cache: The memory Hierarchy & Cache Memory, Cache architecture,

Discussions on latest applications of ARM.

09 Hrs

UNIT II

Introduction to ARM instruction set: Data processing instructions , Branch Instructions, Load Store Instructions,

Software Interrupt Instruction, Program status Register Instructions, Loading

Constants, ARMv5E Extensions, and Conditional Execution.

09 Hrs

UNIT III

Introduction to the THUMB Instruction set:

Thumb register Usage, ARM-Thumb Interworking, other branch instructions,

Data Processing Instructions, Single register Load – store Instructions, Multiple

register Load Store Instruction, Stack Instructions, and Software Interrupt

Instruction.

09 Hrs

UNIT IV

Interrupts & Exception Handling: Exception Handling, Interrupts, Interrupt

handling schemes. Basic Programming.

Embedded firmware Design and Development: Embedded firmware Design

approaches, Embedded firmware Design languages.

09 Hrs

UNIT V

Embedded system Design with Vxworks: Task creation and Management, Task

Scheduling and Kernel Services, Inter task communication, Task synchronization

and Mutual exclusion, Interrupt Handling, Watch dog for task execution

Monitoring.

Types of file generated on cross compilation: Types of files, Disassembler /

Decompiler, Simulators, Emulators and Debugging.

09 Hrs

Course Outcomes: After completing the course, the students will be able to

1 Describe the basic design principles of ARM processor based system.

2 Identify the different attributes for designing ARM processor based application.

3 Analyze the execution of Thumb instructions.

4 Design ARM based embedded system using VxWorks

Page 129: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

129

Reference Books

1. Andrew N. Sloss, “ARM system developer’s guide”, Elsevier, 2008 , ISBN :

9781558608740

2. Shibu KV, “Introduction to Embedded systems”, McGraw Hill, 9th Reprint 2013,

ISBN : 8186308792

3. William Hohl, “ARM Assembly Language – Fundamentals and Techniques”, CRC

Press, 2009, ISBN : 9781439806104

4. J.R. Gibson, “ARM Assembly Language An Introduction”, CENGAGE Learning,

2010, ISBN: 9788131513606.

In case of a course having only theory, the following minimum guidelines may be

followed.

Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE)

( Theory – 100 Marks)

Evaluation method Course with Assignment

Quiz -1 10

Test -1 30

Quiz -2 10

Quiz -3 10

Test -2 30

Assignment 10

Total 100

Semester End Evaluation

Theory (100)

Part- –A

Objective type questions 20

Part –B

There should be five questions from five units. Each question should be for maximum

of 16 Marks.

The UNIT-1, UNIT-4 and UNIT-5 should not have any choice.

The UNIT-2 and UNIT-3 should have an internal choice.

Both the questions should be of the same complexity in terms of COs and Bloom’s

taxonomy level.

80

Total 100

Note: The faculty teaching the course may adapt additional methods for evaluation

within the total maximum marks.

Page 130: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

130

What To

whom

Frequency

of

conductio

n

Max

Mark

s

Evidence Contribution to

Course Outcome

Dir

ect

Ass

essm

ent

Met

hod

s CIE

Quiz

Student

s

Three 30 Answer

Scripts 80

%

100

%

90

%

Test Two 60/50

Assignment/Self

-study 2 phases 10/20

Reports /

Record

Books Laboratory Weekly 50

SE

E

Semester End

Examination

End of

every

semester

Consisting

of Part-A

and Part-B

100

Answer

Scripts

20

%

Semester End

Laboratory

End of

every

semester

laboratory

50

Ind

irec

t A

ssess

men

t

met

hod

s

Course End Survey Student

s

End of

course

Questionnair

e

Based on

COs

10%

Note: Individual faculty may adopt various methods for conducting effective quizzes

and evaluate the same. The frequency of quizzes may be more than three also.

CO-PO Mapping

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 M L M L --- L --- --- --- --- L ---

CO2 L L L --- L L --- --- --- --- --- L

CO3 --- --- M --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

CO4 L M M L M L --- --- --- --- L L

Low-1Medium-2 High-3

Page 131: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

131

Semester: VI

Course Title: MULTI MEDIA COMMUNICATION

Course Code: 16TE6C3 CIE Marks: 100

Hrs/Week: L:T:P:S: 3:2:0:0 SEE Marks: 100

Credits: 04 SEE Duration: 3Hrs

Course Learning Objectives: The students will be able to

1 Describe data compression algorithms for multimedia communication.

2 Analyze lossless compression techniques for digital data.

3 Use quantizers and transform coding for data compression

4 Apply multimedia system standards for different applications.

5 Explain multimedia networks and their applications

UNIT-I

Multimedia Communications: Multimedia information representation, multimedia networks, multimedia

applications, Qos-Network QoS and application QoS.

09 Hrs

UNIT-II

Multimedia Information Representation:

Digitization principles, Text formats –Unformatted, formatted and hypertext;

Images- Graphics, Documents; Audio and Video.

09Hrs

UNIT-III

Text and Image Compression: Compression principles, Text compression- Huffman coding, Arithmetic Coding,

LZ, LZW coding; Image compression- GIF, TIFF, Digitized documents and

pictures, JPEG.

09Hrs

UNIT-IV

Audio and Video Compression:

Audio compression - DPCM, Adaptive DPCM, Adaptive and Linear predictive

coding, CELP, MPEG and Dolby audio coders.

Video compression -video compression principles; Standards - H.261, H.263,

MPEG, MPEG-1, MPEG-2, MPEG-4.

09 Hrs

UNIT-V

Multimedia Entertainment Networks:

Cable TV networks – HFC networks; Satellite TV networks – broadcast television

principles, digital television, services; Terrestrial television networks – principles,

digital television and interactive services; High speed PSTN access technologies –

ADSL, VDSL.

09 Hrs

Course Outcomes: After completing the course, the students will be able to

1 Analyze different multimedia data for processing.

2 Apply Sampling, Quantization and transform coding for data compression

3 Describe multimedia system standards such as JPEG & MPEG.

4 Describe the functioning of Cable TV, satellite TV, digital TV and High speed access

technologies.

Reference Books

Page 132: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

132

1. Fred Halsall, “Multimedia Communications”, Pearson Education, 2008, ISBN:

1405814292.

2. Li and Drew, “Fundamentals of Multimedia”, PHI, 2006, ISBN: 9788120328174.

3. K.R. Rao, Zoran S.Bojkovic, D.A.Milovanovic, “Multimedia Communication

Systems”, PHI, 2009, ISBN: 8120321456.

In case of a course having only theory, the following minimum guidelines may be

followed.

Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE)

( Theory – 100 Marks)

Evaluation method Course with Assignment

Quiz -1 10

Test -1 30

Quiz -2 10

Quiz -3 10

Test -2 30

Assignment 10

Total 100

Semester End Evaluation

Theory (100)

Part- –A

Objective type questions 20

Part –B

There should be five questions from five units. Each question should be for maximum

of 16 Marks.

The UNIT-1, UNIT-4 and UNIT-5 should not have any choice.

The UNIT-2 and UNIT-3 should have an internal choice.

Both the questions should be of the same complexity in terms of COs and Bloom’s

taxonomy level.

80

Total 100

Note: The faculty teaching the course may adapt additional methods for evaluation

within the total maximum marks.

Page 133: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

133

What To

whom

Frequency

of

conductio

n

Max

Mark

s

Evidence Contribution to

Course Outcome

Dir

ect

Ass

essm

ent

Met

hod

s CIE

Quiz

Student

s

Three 30 Answer

Scripts 80

%

100

%

90

%

Test Two 60/50

Assignment/Self

-study 2 phases 10/20

Reports /

Record

Books Laboratory Weekly 50

SE

E

Semester End

Examination

End of

every

semester

Consisting

of Part-A

and Part-B

100

Answer

Scripts

20

%

Semester End

Laboratory

End of

every

semester

laboratory

50

Ind

irec

t A

ssess

men

t

met

hod

s

Course End Survey Student

s

End of

course

Questionnair

e

Based on

COs

10%

Note: Individual faculty may adopt various methods for conducting effective quizzes

and evaluate the same. The frequency of quizzes may be more than three also.

CO-PO Mapping

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 H --- M H M --- --- --- --- --- --- M

CO2 H M M L M --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

CO3 L L M M M M --- --- M --- --- ---

CO4 L M L L --- H M --- H L L M

Low-1Medium-2 High-3

Page 134: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

134

Semester: VI

Course Title: OPERATING SYSTEMS

Course Code: 16TE6C4 CIE Marks: 100

Hrs/Week: L:T:P:S: 3:2:0:0 SEE Marks: 100

Credits: 04 SEE Duration: 3Hrs

Course Learning Objectives: The students will be able to

1 Define fundamental principles of operating system design and kernel implementation.

2 Interpret the concepts of memory hierarchy and caching and how they affect

performance.

3 Analyze resource management in Operating System.

4 Evaluate and identify the algorithms for resource management.

5 Implement operating system algorithms using any high level language.

UNIT-I

Introduction:

What is Operating Systems? Goals of an OS, Operations of OS, Resource

Allocation and Related Functions, User Interface related functions, Classes of OS

- Multiprogramming Systems, Time Sharing System, Real-Time Operating

System.

Structure of Operating System: Operation of an OS, Structure of the supervisor, Configuring and Installing the

Supervisor, Virtual Machine OS, Kernel Based OS, Microkernel Based OS.

09 Hrs

UNIT-II

Processes:

Process concept, Process Scheduling, Operations on processes, cooperating

process, Inter process communication, Multithreading Models, Threading Issues.

CPU Scheduling:

Basic concepts, Scheduling Criteria, Scheduling Algorithms, Multi-processor

scheduling, Thread scheduling.

09Hrs

UNIT-III

Process Synchronization:

The critical selection problem, Peterson’s solutions, Synchronization Hardware,

Semaphores.

Deadlocks:

System models, Deadlocks Characterization, Methods for handling Deadlocks,

Deadlock Prevention, Deadlock Avoidance, Deadlock Detection, Recovery from

Deadlock.

09 Hrs

UNIT-IV

Memory management:

Swapping, Contiguous Memory Allocation, Paging, Structure of the Page Table,

Segmentation.

Virtual Memory:

Demand Paging, Copy-on-write, Page Replacement, Allocation of Frames,

Thrashing, Memory-Mapped Files, and Allocation Kernel Memory.

09 Hrs

UNIT-V

File Systems:

File concept, Access methods, Protection, File-system structure, File-system 09 Hrs

Page 135: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

135

Implementation, Directory Implementation, Allocation Methods.

Case Studies: WINDOWS Overview, Thread Management, Scheduling

Management, Memory Management, I/Os, File system.

Course Outcomes: After completing the course, the students will be able to

1 Identify and interpret various functions, goals and resource management in operating

system.

2 Describe and Implement key parameters to improve the Process Scheduling, Memory

Management and I/O file system.

3 Apply the knowledge learnt to support the system in terms of best performance using

resources.

4 Compare and analyze the functionality of different operating system like windows using

case study.

Reference Books

1. A Sliberschatz and P B Galvin, “Operating System Concepts”, Addison Wesley,7th

Edition, 2011 Reprint. ISBN NO:978-81-265-0962-1

2. D. M. Dhamdhere,”Operating Systems –A Concept Based Approach”- TMH,5th

Reprint, 2005, ISBN NO: 0-07-061194-7.

3. William Stallings. “Operating Systems Internals and Design Principles”, Pearson,

Prentice Hall, 7th edition, 2012. ISBN NO:978-0132309981.

4. Andrew S. Tanenbaum, “Operating Systems, Design and Implementation”,Pearson

Education, 2006. ISBN NO:978-0131429383.

Page 136: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

136

In case of a course having only theory, the following minimum guidelines may be

followed.

Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE)

( Theory – 100 Marks)

Evaluation method Course with Assignment

Quiz -1 10

Test -1 30

Quiz -2 10

Quiz -3 10

Test -2 30

Assignment 10

Total 100

Semester End Evaluation

Theory (100)

Part- –A

Objective type questions 20

Part –B

There should be five questions from five units. Each question should be for maximum

of 16 Marks.

The UNIT-1, UNIT-4 and UNIT-5 should not have any choice.

The UNIT-2 and UNIT-3 should have an internal choice.

Both the questions should be of the same complexity in terms of COs and Bloom’s

taxonomy level.

80

Total 100

Note: The faculty teaching the course may adapt additional methods for evaluation

within the total maximum marks.

Page 137: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

137

What To

whom

Frequency

of

conductio

n

Max

Mark

s

Evidence Contribution to

Course Outcome

Dir

ect

Ass

essm

ent

Met

hod

s CIE

Quiz

Student

s

Three 30 Answer

Scripts 80

%

100

%

90

%

Test Two 60/50

Assignment/Self

-study 2 phases 10/20

Reports /

Record

Books Laboratory Weekly 50

SE

E

Semester End

Examination

End of

every

semester

Consisting

of Part-A

and Part-B

100

Answer

Scripts

20

%

Semester End

Laboratory

End of

every

semester

laboratory

50

Ind

irec

t A

ssess

men

t

met

hod

s

Course End Survey Student

s

End of

course

Questionnair

e

Based on

COs

10%

Note: Individual faculty may adopt various methods for conducting effective quizzes

and evaluate the same. The frequency of quizzes may be more than three also.

CO-PO Mapping

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 L L M --- L --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

CO2 M H M --- M --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

CO3 M H --- L M --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

CO4 L M --- M --- --- --- --- L --- --- ---

Low-1Medium-2 High-3

Page 138: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

138

Semester: VI

Course Title: MICROWAVE INTEGRATED CIRCUITS

Course Code: 16TE6D1 CIE Marks: 100

Hrs/Week: L:T:P:S: 3:0:0:4 SEE Marks: 100

Credits: 04 SEE Duration: 3Hrs

Course Learning Objectives: The students will be able to

1 Recognize the effects of miniaturization of microwave devices.

2 Analyze the design issues of RFICs

3 Identify Passive Circuit Elements in RF systems

4 Design RF active subsystems on RFICs.

UNIT-I

Introduction:

Lower Frequency Analog Design and Microwave Design Versus Radio Frequency

Integrated Circuit Design, Types of MICs - HMICs, MMICs,

Issues in RFIC design, noise, linearity and filtering:

Introduction, Noise, thermal Noise, Noise figure, The noise figure of an Amplifier

circuits and components in series, Linearity and Distortion in RF circuits, Third-

order and second order Intercepts point, the 1-db compression point, Broadband

measures of linearity. Filtering issues, image signals and image reject filtering.

Blockers and Blocker filtering.

08 Hrs

UNIT-II

Impedance Matching

Introduction, review of smith chart, impedance matching using LC networks,

bandwidth and Q factor of matching networks

The use and design of passive circuit elements in IC technologies:

Introduction, sheet resistance and the skin effect, parasitic capacitance &

inductance, Applications of On-chip spiral inductors and transformers, On-chip

Transmission lines,

08 Hrs

UNIT-III

LNA Design:

Common-Emitter Amplifier, Noise in Amplifiers, Input-Referred Noise Model of

the Bipolar Transistor, Noise Figure of the Common-Emitter Amplifier, Input

Matching of LNAs for Low Noise, Relationship Between Noise Figure and Bias

Current, Linearity in Amplifiers - Exponential Nonlinearity in the Bipolar

Transistor, Nonlinearity in the Output Impedance of the Bipolar Transistor, High-

Frequency Nonlinearity in the Bipolar Transistor.

08 Hrs

UNIT-IV

Mixers :

Mixing with Nonlinearity, Basic Mixer Operation, Controlled Transconductance

Mixer, Double-Balanced Mixer, Mixer Noise, Linearity, Improving Isolation,

Image Rejection

Voltage-Controlled Oscillators : The LC Resonator, Configuration of the Amplifier as Colpitts oscillator, Analysis

of an Oscillator as a Feedback System, Negative Resistance Generated by the

Amplifier, The Effect of Parasitics on the Frequency of Oscillation, Large-Signal

Nonlinearity in the Transistor, Phase Noise

08 Hrs

Page 139: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

139

UNIT-V

Power Amplifiers :

Power Capability, Efficiency Calculations, Matching Considerations,

Classification of Power Amplifiers, Amplifier Classes for RF Integrated Circuits,

AC Load Line, Matching to Achieve Desired Power, Transistor Saturation,

Current Limits, Power Combining, Thermal Runaway—Ballasting, Breakdown

Voltage, Effects of Nonlinearity

08 Hrs

Course Outcomes: After completing the course, the students will be able to

1 Explain design concepts and performance parameters in RFICs

2 Identify different Passive Circuit Elements on RF ICs

3 Analyze the characteristics of RF subsystems

4 Design various RF subsystems for RF transceivers.

Reference Books

1. John Rogers, Calvin Plett -“Radio Frequency Integrated Circuit Design”, Artech

house, 2003

2. Mathew M. Radmanesh, “Radio Frequency and Microwave Electronics”,

PearsonEducation Asia edition, 2001

Page 140: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

140

In case of a course having only theory, the following minimum guidelines may be

followed.

Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE)

( Theory – 100 Marks)

Evaluation method Course with Self-study

Quiz -1 10

Test -1 25

Quiz -2 10

Quiz -3 10

Test -2 25

Self-study (EL) 20

Total 100

Semester End Evaluation

Theory (100)

Part- –A

Objective type questions 20

Part –B

There should be five questions from five units. Each question should be for maximum

of 16 Marks.

The UNIT-1, UNIT-4 and UNIT-5 should not have any choice.

The UNIT-2 and UNIT-3 should have an internal choice.

Both the questions should be of the same complexity in terms of COs and Bloom’s

taxonomy level.

80

Total 100

Note: The faculty teaching the course may adapt additional methods for evaluation

within the total maximum marks.

Page 141: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

141

What To

whom

Frequency

of

conductio

n

Max

Mark

s

Evidence Contribution to

Course Outcome

Dir

ect

Ass

essm

ent

Met

hod

s CIE

Quiz

Student

s

Three 30 Answer

Scripts 80

%

100

%

90

%

Test Two 60/50

Assignment/Self

-study 2 phases 10/20

Reports /

Record

Books Laboratory Weekly 50

SE

E

Semester End

Examination

End of

every

semester

Consisting

of Part-A

and Part-B

100

Answer

Scripts

20

%

Semester End

Laboratory

End of

every

semester

laboratory

50

Ind

irec

t A

ssess

men

t

met

hod

s

Course End Survey Student

s

End of

course

Questionnair

e

Based on

COs

10%

Note: Individual faculty may adopt various methods for conducting effective quizzes

and evaluate the same. The frequency of quizzes may be more than three also.

CO-PO Mapping

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 M M M M H --- --- --- --- L --- L

CO2 M M M M M --- --- --- --- L --- M

CO3 H H M M M --- --- --- --- L --- M

CO4 H H H M H --- --- --- --- L --- M

Low-1Medium-2 High-3

Page 142: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

142

Semester: VI

Course Title: DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSOR ARCHITECTURE

Course Code: 16TE6D2 CIE Marks: 100

Hrs/Week: L:T:P:S: 3:0:0:4 SEE Marks: 100

Credits: 04 SEE Duration: 3Hrs

Course Learning Objectives: The students will be able to

1 Describe the architectural features of DSP processor.

2 Analyze various addressing modes of TMS320C54xx DSP processor

3 Compare the architectural features of different fixed point DSPs.

4 Interface Memory and Parallel I/O Peripherals and CODEC to Programmable DSP

Device

5 Develop different applications on TMS320C54xx DSP processor

6 Write the simple programs to implement different DSP algorithms.

UNIT-I

Introduction to Digital Signal Processing :

Introduction, A Digital Signal-Processing System, Linear Time-Invariant Systems,

Digital Filters, Decimation and Interpolation.

Architectures for Programmable Digital Signal-Processing Devices :

Introduction, Basic Architectural Features, DSP Computational Building Blocks,

Bus Architecture and Memory, Data Addressing Capabilities, Address Generation

Unit, Programmability an Program Execution, Speed Issues, Features for External

Interfacing .

08Hrs

UNIT-II

Programmable Digital Signal Processors:

Introduction, Commercial Digital Signal-processing Devices, Data Addressing

Modes of TMS320C54xx Digital Signal Processors, Data Addressing Modes of

TMS320C54xx Processors, Memory Space of TMS320C54xx Processors,

Program Control, TMS320C54xx Instructions and Programming, On-Chip

peripherals, Interrupts of TMS320C54xx Processors, Pipeline Operation of

TMS320C54xx Processors.

08Hrs

UNIT-III

Implementations of Basic DSP Algorithms and FFT algorithms:

The Q-notation, FIR Filters, IIR Filters, Interpolation Filters, Decimation Filters,

Adaptive filters.An FFT Algorithm for DFT Computation, A Butterfly

Computation, Overflow and Scaling, Bit-Reversed Index Generation, FFT

Implementation on the TMS320C54xx, Computation of the Signal Spectrum

08Hrs

UNIT- IV

Interfacing Memory and Parallel I/O Peripherals to Programmable DSP

Devices:. Introduction, Memory Space Organization, External Bus Interfacing

Signals, Memory Interface, Parallel I/O Interface, Programmed I/O, Interrupts and

I/O, Direct Memory Access.

Interfacing Serial Converters to a Programmable DSP Device:

Introduction, Synchronous Serial Interface, A multi-channel Buffered Serial Port

(McBSP), A CODEC Interface Circuit.

08Hrs

UNIT-V

Applications: DSP system, DSP based Biotelemetry Receiver, Speech processing 08Hrs

Page 143: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

143

Systems, Image Processing Systems.

Overview of Floating Point Processors: Architectural features of C67X

processor.

Course Outcomes: After completing the course, the students will be able to

1 Explain basic requirements and features of programmable DSP devices.

2 Describe the importance of McBSP, CODEC interfaces and DSP applications.

3 Analyze and develop simple programs to implement different DSP algorithms.

4 Design interfaces for digital signal processors with memory and I/O peripherals.

Reference Books

1. Avatar Singh and S Srinivasan, “Digital Signal Processing”, Thomson Learning,

2004. ISBN: 9788131500347

2. B Venkataramani and M Bhaskar, ”Digital Signal Processors” - TMH, 2nd edition,

2011 ISBN: 0072393912.

3. E.C.Ifeachor and B.W.Jervis, “Digital Signal Processing – A Practical approach”,

Second edition, Pearson Education, 2002. ISBN:0201596199

In case of a course having only theory, the following minimum guidelines may be

followed.

Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE)

( Theory – 100 Marks)

Evaluation method Course with Self-study

Quiz -1 10

Test -1 25

Quiz -2 10

Quiz -3 10

Test -2 25

Self-study (EL) 20

Total 100

Semester End Evaluation

Theory (100)

Part- –A

Objective type questions 20

Part –B

There should be five questions from five units. Each question should be for maximum

of 16 Marks.

The UNIT-1, UNIT-4 and UNIT-5 should not have any choice.

The UNIT-2 and UNIT-3 should have an internal choice.

Both the questions should be of the same complexity in terms of COs and Bloom’s

taxonomy level.

80

Total 100

Page 144: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

144

Note: The faculty teaching the course may adapt additional methods for evaluation

within the total maximum marks.

What To

whom

Frequency

of

conductio

n

Max

Mark

s

Evidence Contribution to

Course Outcome

Dir

ect

Ass

essm

ent

Met

hod

s CIE

Quiz

Student

s

Three 30 Answer

Scripts 80

%

100

%

90

%

Test Two 60/50

Assignment/Self

-study 2 phases 10/20

Reports /

Record

Books Laboratory Weekly 50

SE

E

Semester End

Examination

End of

every

semester

Consisting

of Part-A

and Part-B

100

Answer

Scripts

20

%

Semester End

Laboratory

End of

every

semester

laboratory

50

Ind

irec

t A

ssess

men

t

met

hod

s

Course End Survey Student

s

End of

course

Questionnair

e

Based on

COs

10%

Note: Individual faculty may adopt various methods for conducting effective quizzes

and evaluate the same. The frequency of quizzes may be more than three also.

CO-PO Mapping

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 M L --- M --- --- --- --- L M --- L

CO2 --- M --- L M --- --- --- --- M L M

CO3 M L M M M --- --- --- --- --- --- M

CO4 M M H --- L --- --- M --- --- L ---

Low-1Medium-2 High-3

Page 145: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

145

Semester: VI

Course Title: CRYPTOGRAPHY AND NETWORK SECURITY

Course Code: 16TE6D3 CIE Marks: 100

Hrs/Week: L:T:P:S: 3:0:0:4 SEE Marks: 100

Credits: 04 SEE Duration: 3Hrs

Course Learning Objectives: The students will be able to

1 Define the fundamentals of Security and cryptography for data transmission.

2 Explain the principles of cryptography and encryption

3 Analyze modern stenographic techniques and differentiate between stenography and

cryptography

4 Explain IRM features and describe DRM systems and technologies

5 Identify the necessity of data security in various industries.

UNIT-I

Introduction :

Introduction to encryption, Importance of prime numbers, Types of encryption,

How encryption is used.

Classical Encryption Techniques:

Symmetric Cipher Model, Substitution Techniques, Transposition Techniques,

Rotor Machines.

Block Ciphers and Data Encryption Standards (DES):

Block Cipher Principles, The Data Encryption Standard, The Strength of DES,

AES

08 Hrs

UNIT-II

Public-Key Cryptography and RSA:

Principles of Public-Key Cryptosystems, The RSA Algorithm, Key management,

Diffie-Hellman key exchange.

Message Authentication and Hash Functions:

Authentication Functions, Message Authentication Codes (MAC), Hash

Functions, Security of MAC and Hash Functions.

08 Hrs

UNIT-III

Authentication Applications:

Kerberos, X-509 Authentication Service, Public-Key Infrastructure.

Electronic Mail security:

Pretty good privacy, S/MIME, Data compression using ZIP, Radix-64 conversion,

PGP random number generation.

08 Hrs

UNIT-IV

Steganography:

Introduction to Steganography, Modern Techniques of Steganography,Comparison

between steganography and cryptography, Stenographic Techniques,Detecting

Steganography, Stegoanalysis, uses of Steganography

Information Rights Management:

Introduction to IRM, Features, Naming conventions of IRM.

Digital Right Management:

Introduction to DRM, Environment For DRM Systems, Evaluation Criteria for

DRM Systems, Common DRM techniques, DRM technologies, Issues,

Challenges.

08 Hrs

Page 146: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

146

UNIT-V

Encryption and Data Security in Industries :

Data encryption (local and Cloud )in Banking and Financial Transactions, Data

encryption Methods used in Secure Auto teller Machines, Role of encryption in

Mobile industry, Importance of Email Encryption in Health Care Industry, Data

Security in Manufacturing Industries.

08 Hrs

Course Outcomes: After completing the course, the students will be able to

1 Explain the fundamental concepts, issues, principles and theories of cryptography and

Encryption for data transmission.

2 Apply contemporary theories, process and tools in the development and evaluation of

solutions to product design

3 Analyze cryptographic and stegnographic techniques, and differentiate between them.

4 Design solutions to securely communicate in the appropriate form with the clients.

Reference Books

1. Williams Stallings, “Cryptography and Network Security”, Pearson Education/PHI, 2003,

ISBN:0-13-111502-2.

2. Perlman - Kaufman Spenciner, “Network Security”, Pearson Education/PHI, 2002,ISBN:

9971–51–345–5.

3. Atul Kahate, “Cryptography & Network Security”, TMH 2003,ISBN-81-203-2186-3.

4. Gregory Kipper, “Investigator's Guide to Steganography

In case of a course having only theory, the following minimum guidelines may be

followed.

Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE)

( Theory – 100 Marks)

Evaluation method Course with Self-study

Quiz -1 10

Test -1 25

Quiz -2 10

Quiz -3 10

Test -2 25

Self-study (EL) 20

Total 100

Semester End Evaluation

Theory (100)

Part- –A

Objective type questions 20

Part –B

There should be five questions from five units. Each question should be for maximum

of 16 Marks.

The UNIT-1, UNIT-4 and UNIT-5 should not have any choice.

The UNIT-2 and UNIT-3 should have an internal choice.

80

Page 147: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

147

Both the questions should be of the same complexity in terms of COs and Bloom’s

taxonomy level.

Total 100

Note: The faculty teaching the course may adapt additional methods for evaluation

within the total maximum marks.

Page 148: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

148

What To

whom

Frequency

of

conductio

n

Max

Mark

s

Evidence Contribution to

Course Outcome

Dir

ect

Ass

essm

ent

Met

hod

s CIE

Quiz

Student

s

Three 30 Answer

Scripts 80

%

100

%

90

%

Test Two 60/50

Assignment/Self

-study 2 phases 10/20

Reports /

Record

Books Laboratory Weekly 50

SE

E

Semester End

Examination

End of

every

semester

Consisting

of Part-A

and Part-B

100

Answer

Scripts

20

%

Semester End

Laboratory

End of

every

semester

laboratory

50

Ind

irec

t A

ssess

men

t

met

hod

s

Course End Survey Student

s

End of

course

Questionnair

e

Based on

COs

10%

Note: Individual faculty may adopt various methods for conducting effective quizzes

and evaluate the same. The frequency of quizzes may be more than three also.

CO-PO Mapping

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 H H H --- --- L --- --- M --- --- ---

CO2 H H M M M L --- --- M --- --- ---

CO3 H H M M M L --- --- M --- --- ---

CO4 H H H M M L --- --- M --- --- ---

Low-1Medium-2 High-3

Page 149: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

149

Semester: VI

Course Title: JAVA

Course Code: 16TE6D4 CIE Marks: 100

Hrs/Week: L:T:P:S: 3:0:0:4 SEE Marks: 100

Credits: 04 SEE Duration: 3Hrs

Course Learning Objectives: The students will be able to

1 Map the concept learnt under object orientation by considering suitable use-cases and

implement same using the programming constructs specified in Java.

2 Build awareness of basic programming constructs and methods in Java and implement

simple programs on it.

3 Introduce utilities and advanced programming concepts in Java to cater the demand of

full-fledged application.

4 Present an industry relevant technology and highlight its roles in an Enterprise

application.

5 Develop a project that will apply concepts in to workable code.

UNIT-I

Java Programming Fundamentals: Features, Data Types, Variables and Arrays ,

Operators , Control Statements ,Introduction to Classes : Class Fundamentals ,

Declaring Objects , Assigning Object Reference Variables , Introducing Methods ,

Constructors ,Static fields and Methods, Super and this keyword, Inheritance

,Interface ,Inner-classes, Package. Example of Class template in Java

Programming – Exceptions, Threads, Java Collections.

08 Hrs

UNIT-II

Exception Handling: Exception-Handling Fundamentals – Exception Classes,

Exception Types, Uncaught Exceptions, Using try and catch, multiple catch

Clauses, Nested try Statements, throw, throws, finally, Java’s Built-in Exceptions,

Creating Your Own Exception Subclasses Chained Exceptions.

Multithreaded Programming : Java Thread Classes, The Java Thread Model ,

The Main Thread , Creating a Thread, Creating Multiple Threads, Using isAlive( )

and join( ) , Thread Priorities , Synchronization , Suspending, Resuming and

Stopping Threads ,Selfish thread.

08Hrs

UNIT-III

Collections :The Collection Interfaces ,The Collection Classes , Accessing a

Collection via an Iterator , Storing User-Defined Classes in Collections, The

Random Access Interface.

J2EE Database Concepts : JBDC Driver types , JDBC Packages , JDBC

Process, Database Connection , Connection pool ,Statement Objects , Result Sets ,

Transaction processing ,Exceptions.

08 Hrs

UNIT-IV

MVC: An overview of application architecture, multi-tier architecture, Applying

Software architecture pattern - MVC Architecture,

Servlets: The Life Cycle of a Servlet, Using Tomcat for Servlet Development A

simple Servlet, The Servlet API, The Javax.servlet Package, Reading Servlet

Parameter, The Javax.servlet.http package, Handling HTTP Requests and

08 Hrs

Page 150: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

150

Responses, Using Cookies, Session Tracking.

Java Server Pages (JSP): JSP Tags, Tomcat, Request String, User Sessions,

Cookies, Session Objects.

UNIT-V

Native methods : Calling a C function from Java programming Language ,

Numeric parameters and return Values, String Parameter ,Accessing Fields

,Encoding Signatures , Calling Java methods ,Accessing array elements ,Handling

Errors.

08 Hrs

Course Outcomes: After completing the course, the students will be able to

1 Understand the fundamentals concepts of JAVA such as Exceptions, String handling ,

JDBC, JNI , JSP.

2 Design of applications using Java allied technologies.

3 Develop an application using Collection framework , JDBC ,JNI and Servlets.

4 Implement web based application using Java and advance J2EE technologies.

Reference Books

1. Herbert Schildt ,"The Complete Reference - Java " 7th Edition ,TMH Publications.

ISBN-10: 0071808558

2. Jim Keogh ,"The Complete Reference -J2EE ",Tata McGRAW Hill publications.

ISBN-10, 0070529124

3. Cay S. Horstmann ,"Core Java 2 Vol II "7th Edition ,Pearson ,2005. ISBN-10:

0130471771

In case of a course having only theory, the following minimum guidelines may be

followed.

Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE)

( Theory – 100 Marks)

Evaluation method Course with Self-study

Quiz -1 10

Test -1 25

Quiz -2 10

Quiz -3 10

Test -2 25

Self-study (EL) 20

Total 100

Semester End Evaluation

Theory (100)

Part- –A

Objective type questions 20

Part –B

There should be five questions from five units. Each question should be for maximum

of 16 Marks.

The UNIT-1, UNIT-4 and UNIT-5 should not have any choice.

80

Page 151: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

151

The UNIT-2 and UNIT-3 should have an internal choice.

Both the questions should be of the same complexity in terms of COs and Bloom’s

taxonomy level.

Total 100

Note: The faculty teaching the course may adapt additional methods for evaluation

within the total maximum marks.

Page 152: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

152

What To

whom

Frequency

of

conductio

n

Max

Mark

s

Evidence Contribution to

Course Outcome

Dir

ect

Ass

essm

ent

Met

hod

s CIE

Quiz

Student

s

Three 30 Answer

Scripts 80

%

100

%

90

%

Test Two 60/50

Assignment/Self

-study 2 phases 10/20

Reports /

Record

Books Laboratory Weekly 50

SE

E

Semester End

Examination

End of

every

semester

Consisting

of Part-A

and Part-B

100

Answer

Scripts

20

%

Semester End

Laboratory

End of

every

semester

laboratory

50

Ind

irec

t A

ssess

men

t

met

hod

s

Course End Survey Student

s

End of

course

Questionnair

e

Based on

COs

10%

Note: Individual faculty may adopt various methods for conducting effective quizzes

and evaluate the same. The frequency of quizzes may be more than three also.

CO-PO Mapping

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 H M M M L --- --- L --- --- --- L

CO2 H H H M L --- --- L --- --- --- L

CO3 H H H L L --- --- L --- --- --- L

CO4 H H H M L --- --- L --- --- --- L

Low-1Medium-2 High-3

Page 153: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

153

Semester: VI

Course Title: MOBILE NETWORK SYSTEM AND STANDARDS

Course Code: 16GE6XX CIE Marks: 100

Hrs/Week: L:T:P:S:3:0:0:0 SEE Marks: 100

Credits: 03 SEE Duration: 3Hrs

Course Learning Objectives: The students will be able to

1 Understand land mobile concepts, radio link design and remember different generations

of the cellular network.

2 Analyze and compare the concepts of WPAN, WLAN and WMAN standards and their

architecture

3 Design and demonstrate wireless networks for various applications.

UNIT-I

Cellular Wireless Networks: Principles of cellular Networks, cellular system

components and Operations, channel assignment, Attributes of CDMA in cellular

system

08 Hrs

UNIT-II

Second generation Cellular Networks: GSM architecture, IS-95, GPRS, EDGE 08Hrs

UNIT-III

Third generation cellular systems: WCDMA, IMT 2000 and LTE, Convergence

in the network 08Hrs

UNIT-IV

Wireless Personal Area Networks: Network architecture, components,

Applications ,Zigbee, Bluetooth.

Wireless local Area networks: Network Architecture, Standards, applications.

08 Hrs

UNIT-V

Wireless Metropolitan Area Networks: IEEE 802.16 standards, advantages,

WMAN Network architecture, Protocols, Applications. 08 Hrs

Course Outcomes: After completing the course, the students will be able to

1 Understand the architectures and characteristicsof different mobile networks.

2 Analyze the operation of various network technologies and standards

3 Apply the Network standards to a suitable application

4 Compare the advantages of various networks

Reference Books

1. UpenaDalal , “Wireless Communication” 1st Edition , Oxford higher

Eductaion,2009, ISBN-13 :978-0-19-806066-6.

2. Dr. sunil Kumar s Manvi “Wireless and Mobile Networks Concepts and Protocols”,

Willey India Pvt. Ltd., 2010, ISBN:978-81-265-2069-5.

3. Theodore S Rappaport,” Wireless Communications Principles and practice”, 2nd

Edition, Pearson, ISBN 97881-317-3186-4.

In case of a course having only theory, the following minimum guidelines may be

followed.

Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE)

( Theory – 100 Marks)

Page 154: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

154

Evaluation method Course with Assignment

Quiz -1 10

Test -1 30

Quiz -2 10

Quiz -3 10

Test -2 30

Assignment 10

Total 100

Semester End Evaluation

Theory (100)

Part- –A

Objective type questions 20

Part –B

There should be five questions from five units. Each question should be for maximum

of 16 Marks.

The UNIT-1, UNIT-4 and UNIT-5 should not have any choice.

The UNIT-2 and UNIT-3 should have an internal choice.

Both the questions should be of the same complexity in terms of COs and Bloom’s

taxonomy level.

80

Total 100

Note: The faculty teaching the course may adapt additional methods for evaluation

within the total maximum marks.

Page 155: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

155

What To

whom

Frequency

of

conductio

n

Max

Mark

s

Evidence Contribution to

Course Outcome

Dir

ect

Ass

essm

ent

Met

hod

s CIE

Quiz

Student

s

Three 30 Answer

Scripts 80

%

100

%

90

%

Test Two 60/50

Assignment/Self

-study 2 phases 10/20

Reports /

Record

Books Laboratory Weekly 50

SE

E

Semester End

Examination

End of

every

semester

Consisting

of Part-A

and Part-B

100

Answer

Scripts

20

%

Semester End

Laboratory

End of

every

semester

laboratory

50

Ind

irec

t A

ssess

men

t

met

hod

s

Course End Survey Student

s

End of

course

Questionnair

e

Based on

COs

10%

Note: Individual faculty may adopt various methods for conducting effective quizzes

and evaluate the same. The frequency of quizzes may be more than three also.

CO-PO Mapping

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 H H M M M L --- --- --- --- L L

CO2 H H H L M --- --- --- --- --- L L

CO3 H H H M M L --- --- --- --- L L

CO4 H H M M M L --- --- --- --- L L

Low-1Medium-2 High-3

Page 156: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

156

Semester: VI

Course Title: Employability Skills and Professional Development of Engineers

Course Code:16HS68 CIE Marks: 50

Hrs/Week: L:T:P:S: SEE Marks: --

Credits: 01 SEE Duration:--

Course Learning Objectives: The students will be able to

1 Improve qualitative and quantitative problem solving skills.

2 Apply critical and logical thinking process to specific problems.

UNIT-I

Aptitude Test Preparation- Importance of Aptitude tests, Key Components,

Quantitative Aptitude – Problem Solving, Data Sufficiency, Data Analysis -

Number Systems, Math Vocabulary, fraction decimals, digit places etc.

Reasoning and Logical Aptitude, - Introduction to puzzle and games organizing

information, parts of an argument, common flaws, arguments and assumptions.

Analytical Reasoning, Critical Reasoning.

06 Hrs

UNIT-II

Verbal Analogies - What are Analogies, How to Solve Verbal Analogies &

developing Higher Vocabulary, Grammar, Comprehension and Application,

Written Ability. Non- Verbal Reasoning, Brain Teasers. Creativity Aptitude.

Group Discussion- Theory &Evaluation : Understanding why and how is the

group discussion conducted, The techniques of group discussion, Discuss the

FAQs of group discussion, body language during GD.

06 Hrs

UNIT-III

Resume Writing- Writing Resume, how to write effective resume,

Understanding the basic essentials for a resume, Resume writing tips Guidelines

for better presentation of facts.

Technical Documentation - Introductionto technical writing- Emphasis on

language difference between general and technical writing, Contents in a

technical document, Report design overview & formatHeadings, list & special

notes, Writing processes, Translating technical information, Power revision

techniques, Patterns & elements of sentences, Common grammar, usage &

punctuation problems.

08 Hrs

UNIT-IV

Interview Skills -a) Personal Interviews , b) Group Interviews , c) Mock

Interviews - Questions asked & how to handle them, Body language in interview,

Etiquette, Dress code in interview, Behavioral and technical interviews, Mock

interviews - Mock interviews with different Panels. Practice on stress

interviews, technical interviews, General HR interviews etc.

06 Hrs

UNIT-V

Interpersonal Relations - Optimal Co-existence, Cultural Sensitivity, Gender

sensitivity

Adapting to the Corporate Culture- Capability & Maturity Model, Decision

Making Analysis, Brain Storm. Adapting to the Corporate Culture

06 Hrs

Course Outcomes: After completing the course, the students will be able to

1 Develop professional skill to suit the industry requirement

Page 157: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

157

2 Analyze problems using quantitative and reasoning skills

3 Develop leadership and interpersonal working skills

4 Demonstrate verbal communication skills with appropriate body language.

Reference Books

1. Stephen R Covey, “The 7 Habits of Highly Effective People”, Free Press, 2004

Edition, ISBN: 0743272455

2. Dale Carnegie, “How to win friends and influence people”, General Press, 1st Edition,

2016, ISBN: 9789380914787

3. Kerry Patterson, Joseph Grenny, Ron Mcmillan, “Crucial Conversation: Tools for

Talking When Stakes are High”, McGraw-Hill Publication, 2012 Edition, ISBN:

9780071772204

4. Ethnus, “Aptimithra: Best Aptitude Book”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2014 Edition, ISBN:

9781259058738

Scheme of Continuous Internal Examination (CIE)

Evaluation will be carried out in TWO Phases.

Phase Activity Weightage

I Test 1 is conducted in III Sem for 50 marks (15 Marks Quiz and 35

Marks Descriptive answers) after completion of 2.5 units for 18 hours

of training sessions.

50%

II Test 2 is conducted in IV Sem for 50 marks ((15 Marks Quiz and 35

Marks Descriptive answers) after completion of half of IIIrd unit and

complete of unit IV and V for 18 hours of training sessions.

50%

At the end of the IV sem Marks of Test 1 and Test 2 is consolidated for 50 marks

and grading is done.

Note: The faculty teaching the course may adapt additional methods for evaluation

within the total maximum marks.

What To

whom

Frequenc

y of

conductio

n

Max

Mark

s

Evidence Contribution to

Course Outcome

Dir

ect

Ass

essm

ent

Met

ho

ds

CIE

Quiz

Student

s

Three 30 Answer

Scripts

80

%

100

%

90

%

Test Two 60/50

Assignment/Self

-study 2 phases 10/20 Reports /

Record

Books Laboratory Weekly 50

Page 158: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

158

SE

E

Semester End

Examination

End of

every

semester

Consisting

of Part-A

and Part-B

100

Answer

Scripts

20

%

Semester End

Laboratory

End of

every

semester

laboratory

50

Ind

irec

t A

ssess

men

t

met

ho

ds

Course End Survey Student

s

End of

course

Questionnair

e

Based on

COs

10%

Note: Individual faculty may adopt various methods for conducting effective quizzes

and evaluate the same. The frequency of quizzes may be more than three also.

CO-PO Mapping

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 --- --- --- --- H --- --- L --- --- --- ---

CO2 --- H --- --- --- --- --- --- L --- --- ---

CO3 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- H --- --- ---

CO4 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- L H M ---

---

Low-1Medium-2 High-3

Page 159: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

159

R. V. COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING, BENGALURU – 59.

(An Autonomous Institution affiliated to VTU, Belgavi)

DEPARTMENT OF TELECOMMUNICATION ENGINEERING SCHEME OF TEACHING AND EXAMINATION

SEVENTH SEMESTER

Sl.

No Course Code Course Title BOS

Credit Allocation Total

Credits Lecture Tutorial Practical SS

(EL)

1 16TE71 Wireless And Mobile

Communication TE 4 0 1 0 5

2 16TE72 Optical Fiber

Communication TE 4 0 1 0 5

3 16TE73 Minor Project TE 3 0 0 0 3

4 16TE7FX Elective F (PE) TE 4 0 0 0 4

5 16TE7GX Elective G(PE) TE 4 0 0 0 4

6 16GH7XX Elective H (OE) TE 3 0 0 0 3

Total No. of Credits 24

No. Of Hrs. 22 0 4 0 26

* EI, EE, CV, EC, ME – 6 hrs. / week Minor Project.

Elective F (PE) Elective Title Elective G(PE) Elective Title Elective H (OE) Elective Title

16TE7F1 ASIC Design 16TE7G1 Cellular Mobile Network

16GH7XX

Space Technology

and Applications

16TE7F2 Digital Image Processing 16TE7G2 DSP Applications

16TE7F3 Satellite Communication 16TE7G3 Adhoc Networks

16TE7F4 Real Time Embedded systems 16TE7G4 IoT

Page 160: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

160

PE - PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE OE- OTHER ELECTIVES

Page 161: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

161

R. V. COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING, BENGALURU – 59.

(An Autonomous Institution affiliated to VTU, Belgavi)

DEPARTMENT OF TELECOMMUNICATION ENGINEERING SCHEME OF TEACHING AND EXAMINATION

EIGTH SEMESTER

Sl.

No. Course Code Course Title BOS

Credit Allocation Total

Credits Lecture Tutorial Practical EL

1 16TEP81 Major Project TE 0 0 16 0 16

2 16TES82 Technical Seminar TE 0 0 2 0 2

3 16HSS83 Innovation and Social Skills HSS 0 0 2 0 2

Total No. of Credits 20

No. Of Hrs. 0 0 40 0

Page 162: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

162

Semester: VII

Course Title: WIRELESS AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION

Course Code: 16TE71 CIE Marks: 100+50=150

Hrs/Week: L:T:P:S: 4:0:2:0 SEE Marks: 100+50=150

Credits: 05 SEE Duration: 3Hrs+3Hrs

Course Learning Objectives: The students will be able to

1 Describe cellular concepts, fading, Wireless Network and standards.

2 Analyze the concepts of propagation model and differentiate different Wireless

networks.

3 Demonstrate path loss models and wireless networks for various applications.

4 Compare the concepts of WBAN, WPAN, WLAN and WMAN standards and their

architecture

UNIT-I

Cellular concept :

Introduction Frequency reuse, Channel Assignment Strategies, Handoff Strategies,

Interference and System Capacity, Improving Coverage and capacity in cellular

systems.

09 Hrs

UNIT-II

Propagation: Introduction to radio wave Propagation, Free Space Propagation

Model, Relating Power to Electric Field, Reflection, Diffraction, Scattering.

Outdoor Propagation models: Okumura, Hata, Indoor Propagation models.

Small scale fading : Small scale fading Multipath Propagation, Impulse Response

Model of multipath channel, Impulse response model of multipath channel, Small

scale Multipath measurements, Parameters of Mobile Multipath Channels, types

of Small scale fading, Fading effects due to Doppler spread.

09 Hrs

UNIT-III

Basics of Wireless Networks: Wireless Network,Wireless switching technology,

Wireless Communication Problems, Wireless Network reference model, Wireless

Networking issues, Wireless Networking standards.

Wireless Body area Network: Network Architecture, Network Components,

Design issues, Network Protocols, WBAN Technologies, WBAN Applications.

09 Hrs

UNIT-IV

Wireless Personal Area Networks: Zigbee, Bluettoth, WPAN and its Network

architecture, WPAN components, WPAN technologies and protocols: IEEE

802.15.1, IEEE 802.15.2, IEEE 802.15.3, IEEE 802.15.4, WPAN Applications.

09 Hrs

UNIT-V

Wireless local Area networks: Network components, Design requirements of

WLAN, Network Architecture, WLAN Standards.

Wireless Metropolitan Area Networks: IEEE 802.16 standards, advantages,

IEEE 802.11 Vs IEEE 802.16, WMAN Network architecture, Broadband Wireless

Networks, WMAN Applications.

09 Hrs

Laboratory Experiments: Using Matlab and VSA system vue

Simulation of Okumura, HATA model and Indoor propagation model

Design and simulation of CDMA and OFDM.

Simulation of 2x2 MIMO.

Simulation of Gaussian minimum shift keyingtechnique.

Demonstrate operation of QPSK modulation.

Demonstrate operation of IEEE 802.11and other standards.

Page 163: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

163

Demonstrate wide band modulation.

Course Outcomes: After completing the course, the students will be able to

1 Explain cellular concepts, fading, wireless networks and Wireless standards.

2 Analyze path loss models, fading types and also distinguishwireless networks and

Wireless standards.

3 Apply the WBAN, WPAN, WLAN and WMAN standards for a given network

application.

4 Evaluate the performance of various wireless network standards.

Reference Books

1. Theodore S Rappaport, “Wireless Communications Principles and practice”, 2nd

Edition, Pearson, ISBN 97881-317-3186-4.

2. Sunil Kumar S Manvi “Wireless and Mobile Networks Concepts and Protocols”,

Willey India Pvt. Ltd., 2010, ISBN:978-81-265-2069-5.

In case of a course having both Theory & Lab, the following minimum guidelines may

be followed

Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE)

( Theory – 100 Marks) (Laboratory- 50 Marks) Total

(150) Evaluation method Course with

assignment

Quiz -1 10 Performance of the student in

the laboratory, every week 40

150

Test -1 30

Quiz -2 10

Quiz -3 10 Test at the end of the semester 10

Test -2 30

Assignments 10

Total

50 Total 100

Semester End Evaluation (SEE)

Theory (100 Marks) Laboratory(50 Marks) Total

(150)

Part- –A

Objective type questions

20 Experiment

Conduction with

proper results

40

Part –B

There should be five questions from five units.

Each question should be for maximum of 16

Marks.

The UNIT-1, UNIT-4 and UNIT-5 should not

have any choice.

The UNIT-2 and UNIT-3 should have an internal

choice.

80

Viva 10

Page 164: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

164

Both the questions should be of the same

complexity in terms of COs and Bloom’s

taxonomy level.

Total

50

150 Total 100

Page 165: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

165

What To

whom

Frequency

of

conductio

n

Max

Mark

s

Evidence Contribution to

Course Outcome

Dir

ect

Ass

essm

ent

Met

hod

s CIE

Quiz

Student

s

Three 30 Answer

Scripts 80

%

100

%

90

%

Test Two 60/50

Assignment/Self

-study 2 phases 10/20

Reports /

Record

Books Laboratory Weekly 50

SE

E

Semester End

Examination

End of

every

semester

Consisting

of Part-A

and Part-B

100

Answer

Scripts

20

%

Semester End

Laboratory

End of

every

semester

laboratory

50

Ind

irec

t A

ssess

men

t

met

hod

s

Course End Survey Student

s

End of

course

Questionnair

e

Based on

COs

10%

Note: Individual faculty may adopt various methods for conducting effective quizzes

and evaluate the same. The frequency of quizzes may be more than three also.

CO-PO Mapping

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 L --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- M --- L

CO2 --- M --- --- --- M L --- --- --- --- ---

CO3 --- M --- H M --- --- --- --- H --- L

CO4 --- H M --- M L --- --- M M --- L

Low-1Medium-2 High-3

Page 166: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

166

Semester:VII

Course Title: OPTICAL FIBRE COMMUNICATION

Course Code: 16TE72 CIE Marks: 100+50=150

Hrs/Week: L:T:P:S: 4:0:2:0 SEE Marks: 100+50=150

Credits: 05 SEE Duration: 3Hrs+3Hrs

Course Learning Objectives: The students will be able to

1 Understand the overview and generations of Optical communication& Networks.

2 Design analog and digital link and their characterization

3 Analyze WDM concepts, components and their selection.

4 Analyze network standards such as SONET/SDH& topologies.

UNIT-I

Overview of Optical Fiber Communications:

Motivations for Light wave Communications, Optical Spectral Bands,

Fundamental Data Communication Concepts, Network Information Rates, Key

Elements of Optical Fiber Systems and Standards for Optical Fiber

Communications.

Optical Fibers: Structures, Wave guiding:

The Nature of Light, Basic Optical Laws and Definitions, Optical Fiber Modes

and Configurations, Mode Theory for Circular Waveguides, Single-mode Fibers,

Graded-index Fiber Structure.

09 Hrs

UNIT II

Signal Degradation in Optical Fibers:

Attenuation, Signal Distortion in Fibers, Characteristics of Single-Mode Fibers

Optical Sources:

Topics from Semiconductor Physics, Light-Emitting Diodes (LEDs), Laser

Diodes, Line Coding.

09 Hrs

UNIT III

Power Launching and Coupling:

Source-to-Fiber Power Launching, Lensing Schemes for Coupling Improvement,

Fiber-to-Fiber Joints, LED Coupling to Single-Mode Fibers, Fiber Splicing,

Optical Fiber Connectors. Photo detectors:

Physical Principles of Photodiodes, Photo detector Noise, Detector Response

Time, Avalanche Multiplication Noise, Structures for InGaAs APDs.

09 Hrs

UNIT IV

Optical Receiver Operation:

Fundamental Receiver Operation, Digital Receiver Performance, Eye Diagrams,

Coherent Detection, Burst-Mode Receivers, Analog Receivers.

Analog Links & Overview of Analog Links, Carrier-to-Noise Ratio,

Multichannel Transmission Techniques

09 Hrs

UNIT V

Digital Links: Point-to-Point Links, Power Penalties

WDM Concepts: Overview of WDM: Operational principles of WDM, WDM

Standards, SONET/SDH: Transmission Formats & Speeds, Rings, Networks.

09 Hrs

Laboratory Experiments

Attenuation, bending losses and Numerical Aperture of optical fiber.

Characterization of an optical source and optical detector.

Page 167: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

167

Characterization of analog link, digital link and BER measurement.

Realization of voice link and TDM.

Simulation of WDM system using Optisystem.

Characterization of WDM system components using Optisystem.

Link power budget analysis using Optisystem.

Course Outcomes: After completing the course, the students will be able to

1 Explain the characterization of fibers, optical sources, detectors & their selection

2 Apply the design methodology for analog & digital optical links

3 Analyze the concepts of WDM in optical networks with standards.

4 Evaluate the selection of network topology and network standards.

Reference Books

1. Gerd Keiser, “Optical Fiber Communication”, Tata MGH, 4th Edition, 2009, ISBN:0-

07-064810-7.

2. John M Senior, “Optical Fiber Communication”, PHI, 2nd Edition, 2009, ISBN-

0324359810.

3. G.P. Agarwal, “Fiber Optics Communication Systems”, John Wiley New York, 3rd

edition, 2004, ISBN:9-8141-2660-8.

In case of a course having both Theory & Lab, the following minimum guidelines may

be followed

Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE)

( Theory – 100 Marks) (Laboratory- 50 Marks) Total

(150) Evaluation method Course with

assignment

Quiz -1 10 Performance of the student in

the laboratory, every week 40

150

Test -1 30

Quiz -2 10

Quiz -3 10 Test at the end of the semester 10

Test -2 30

Assignments 10

Total

50 Total 100

Semester End Evaluation (SEE)

Theory (100 Marks) Laboratory(50 Marks) Total

(150)

Part- –A

Objective type questions

20 Experiment

Conduction with

proper results

40

Part –B

There should be five questions from five units.

Each question should be for maximum of 16

Marks.

Viva 10

Page 168: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

168

The UNIT-1, UNIT-4 and UNIT-5 should not

have any choice.

The UNIT-2 and UNIT-3 should have an internal

choice.

Both the questions should be of the same

complexity in terms of COs and Bloom’s

taxonomy level.

80

Total

50

150 Total 100

Page 169: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

169

What To

whom

Frequency

of

conductio

n

Max

Mark

s

Evidence Contribution to

Course Outcome

Dir

ect

Ass

essm

ent

Met

hod

s CIE

Quiz

Student

s

Three 30 Answer

Scripts 80

%

100

%

90

%

Test Two 60/50

Assignment/Self

-study 2 phases 10/20

Reports /

Record

Books Laboratory Weekly 50

SE

E

Semester End

Examination

End of

every

semester

Consisting

of Part-A

and Part-B

100

Answer

Scripts

20

%

Semester End

Laboratory

End of

every

semester

laboratory

50

Ind

irec

t A

ssess

men

t

met

hod

s

Course End Survey Student

s

End of

course

Questionnair

e

Based on

COs

10%

Note: Individual faculty may adopt various methods for conducting effective quizzes

and evaluate the same. The frequency of quizzes may be more than three also.

CO-PO Mapping

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 H M M L M --- --- --- --- --- --- L

CO2 H H M L M --- --- --- --- --- --- L

CO3 H H H L M --- M --- --- --- --- M

CO4 M M H M H --- M --- --- --- --- M

Low-1Medium-2 High-3

Page 170: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

170

Semester: VII

Course Title: MINOR PROJECT

Course Code:16TE73 CIE Marks:

Hrs/Week: L:T:P:S: 3:0:0:0 SEE Marks:

Credits: 03 SEE Duration: 3Hrs

Course Learning Objectives: The students will be able to

1

2

3

4

5

6

UNIT-I

Hrs

UNIT-II

Hrs

UNIT-III

Hrs

UNIT-IV

Hrs

UNIT-V

Hrs

Page 171: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

171

Course Outcomes: After completing the course, the students will be able to

1

2

3

4

CO-PO Mapping

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1

CO2

CO3

CO4

Low-1Medium-2 High-3

Page 172: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

172

Semester: VII

Course Title: ASIC DESIGN

Course Code: 16 TE7F1 CIE Marks: 100

Hrs/Week: L:T:P:S: 4:0:0:0 SEE Marks: 100

Credits: 04 SEE Duration: 3Hrs

Course Learning Objectives: The students will be able to

1 Explain ASIC methodologies and programmable logic cells to implement a function.

2 Analyze back-end physical design flow, including partitioning, floor-planning,

placement, and routing

3 Design using CAD algorithms and to apply these concepts in ASIC design.

4 Evaluate various design alternatives and make comparative study.

UNIT-I

Introduction to ASICs,Full custom, Semi-custom and Programmable

ASICs,ASICDesign flow,ASIC cell libraries.

Data Logic Cells: Data Path Elements, Adders: Carry skip, Carry bypass, Carry

save, Carry select, Conditional sum, Multiplier (Booth encoding), Data path

Operators, I/O cells.

09 Hrs

UNIT II

ASIC Library Design: Logical effort: Predicting Delay,Logical area and logical

efficiency, Logical paths, Multi stage cells, Optimum delay and number of stages,

Branching effort.

09 Hrs

UNIT III

Programmable ASIC Logic Cells:MUX as Boolean function generators,

Actel ACT: ACT 1, ACT 2 and ACT 3 Logic Modules,

Xilinx LCA: XC3000 CLB, Altera FLEX and MAX.

Programmable ASIC I/O Cells:Xilinx and Altera I/O Block.

Introduction to Logic Synthesis and simulations.

Low-level design entry: Schematic entry for ASICs, Hierarchical design, Net-list

screener.

09Hrs

UNIT IV

ASIC Construction-I: Physical Design, CAD Tools.

Partitioning: Goals and objectives, Constructive Partitioning, Iterative

Partitioning Improvement: KL, FM and Look Ahead algorithms.

Floor planning: Goals and objectives, Floor planning tools, Channel definition,

I/O, Power and Clock planning.

09 Hrs

UNIT V

ASIC Construction-II:

Placement: Goals and Objectives, Min-cut Placement algorithm, Iterative

Placement Improvement, Physical Design Flow.

Global Routing: Goals and objectives, Global Routing Methods, Back-annotation

Detailed Routing: Goals and objectives, Measurement of Channel Density, Left-

Edge and Area-Routing Algorithms.

Circuit extraction and Design checks.

09 Hrs

Course Outcomes: After completing the course, the students will be able to

1 Describe the concepts of ASIC design methodology, data path elements, logical effort

and FPGA architectures.

Page 173: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

173

2 Analyze the design of FPGAs and ASICs suitable for specific tasks, perform design

entry and explain the physical design flow

3 Design data path elements for ASIC cell libraries and compute optimum path delay.

4 Develop CAD algorithms for system partition, floorplan, placement and routing.

Reference Books

1. Michael John Sebastian Smith, “Application Specific Integrated Circuits” Addison-

Wesley Professional; 1st edition, 1997, ISBN: 0-201-50022-1.

2. Neil H.E. Weste, David Harris, and Ayan Banerjee, “CMOS VLSI Design: A Circuits

and Systems Perspective”, 3rdedition, Pearson education, 2006, ISBN: 108177585681.

3. Vikram Arkalgud Chandrasetty, “VLSI Design: A Practical Guide for FPGA and

ASIC Implementations”, Springer, 2011, ISBN: 978-1-4614-1119-2.

In case of a course having only theory, the following minimum guidelines may be

followed.

Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE)

( Theory – 100 Marks)

Evaluation method Course with Assignment

Quiz -1 10

Test -1 30

Quiz -2 10

Quiz -3 10

Test -2 30

Assignment 10

Total 100

Semester End Evaluation

Theory (100)

Part- –A

Objective type questions 20

Part –B

There should be five questions from five units. Each question should be for maximum

of 16 Marks.

The UNIT-1, UNIT-4 and UNIT-5 should not have any choice.

The UNIT-2 and UNIT-3 should have an internal choice.

Both the questions should be of the same complexity in terms of COs and Bloom’s

taxonomy level.

80

Total 100

Note: The faculty teaching the course may adapt additional methods for evaluation

within the total maximum marks.

Page 174: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

174

What To

whom

Frequency

of

conductio

n

Max

Mark

s

Evidence Contribution to

Course Outcome

Dir

ect

Ass

essm

ent

Met

hod

s CIE

Quiz

Student

s

Three 30 Answer

Scripts 80

%

100

%

90

%

Test Two 60/50

Assignment/Self

-study 2 phases 10/20

Reports /

Record

Books Laboratory Weekly 50

SE

E

Semester End

Examination

End of

every

semester

Consisting

of Part-A

and Part-B

100

Answer

Scripts

20

%

Semester End

Laboratory

End of

every

semester

laboratory

50

Ind

irec

t A

ssess

men

t

met

hod

s

Course End Survey Student

s

End of

course

Questionnair

e

Based on

COs

10%

Note: Individual faculty may adopt various methods for conducting effective quizzes

and evaluate the same. The frequency of quizzes may be more than three also.

CO-PO Mapping

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 L L L L L --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

CO2 --- --- --- L H --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

CO3 M L --- L M --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

CO4 L --- L M H --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

Low-1Medium-2 High-3

Page 175: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

175

Semester: VII

Course Title: DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING

Course Code: 16TE7F2 CIE Marks: 100

Hrs/Week: L:T:P:S: 4:0:0:0 SEE Marks: 100

Credits: 04 SEE Duration: 3Hrs

Course Learning Objectives: The students will be able to

1 List and understand various processes and steps employed in image processing.

2 Illustrate different transforms used in image operations.

3 Analyze image enhancement and restoration processes and techniques.

4 Apply image processing in real time applications.

UNIT-I

Introduction: What is Digital Image Processing, Origins of Digital Image

Processing, Examples of fields that use DIP, Fundamental Steps in Digital

Image Processing, Components of an Image Processing System. Digital Image

Fundamentals: Elements of Visual Perception, A Simple Image Formation

Model, Basic Concepts in Sampling and Quantization, Representing Digital

Images, Spatial and Gray-level Resolution, Zooming and Shrinking Digital

Images, Some Basic Relationships Between Pixels, Linear and Nonlinear

Operations.

09 Hrs

UNIT-II

Image Transforms

Two-dimensional orthogonal & unitary transforms, Properties of unitary

transforms, two dimensional discrete Fourier transform, discrete cosine transform,

sine transform, Hadamard transform, Haar transform, Slant transform, KL

transform.

09 Hrs

UNIT-III

Image Enhancement in Spatial domain

Some Basic Gray Level Transformations, Histogram Processing, Enhancement

Using Arithmetic/Logic Operations, Basics of Spatial Filtering, Smoothing Spatial

Filters, Sharpening Spatial Filters

Image Enhancement in the Frequency Domain

Smoothing Frequency-Domain Filters, Sharpening Frequency Domain Filters,

Homomorphic Filtering. Exercises using MatLab.

09 Hrs

UNIT-IV

Image Restoration

A Model of the Image Degradation/Restoration Process, Noise Models,

Restoration in the Presence of Noise Only-Spatial Filtering, Periodic Noise

Reduction by Frequency Domain Filtering, Linear, Position-Invariant

Degradations, Estimating the Degradation Function, Inverse Filtering, Minimum

Mean Square Error (Wiener) Filtering, Constrained Least Squares Filtering,

Geometric Mean Filter, Geometric Transformations

Color Fundamentals, Color Models, Pseudo-color Image Processing, Basics of

Full-Color Image Processing.

09 Hrs

UNIT-V

Morphological Image Processing: Preliminaries, Dilation and Erosion,

Opening and Closing, The Hit-or-Miss Transformation, Some Basic 09 Hrs

Page 176: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

176

Morphological Algorithms. Image Segmentation: Detection of Discontinuities,

Edge Linking and Boundary Detection, Thresholding, Region-Based

Segmentation. Representation and Description: Representation, Boundary

Descriptors, Regional Descriptors, Use of Principal Components for

Description, Relational Descriptors.

Course Outcomes: After completing the course, the students will be able to

1 Explain the different steps and processes of image processing and its Applications.

2 Evaluate the properties of different transforms and their usage in image processing.

3 Analyze different operations on an image forfeatures extraction for a given application

4 Apply and justify the use of image processing in modern multimedia communication,

society and Technology.

Reference Books

1. Rafael C. Gonzalez and Richard E. Woods, “Digital Image Processing”, Pearson

Education, 2nd Edition, 2001, ISBN-13: 978-0131687288

2. Anil K. Jain, “Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing,” Pearson Education/PHI,

2001, ISBN: 9780133361650.

In case of a course having only theory, the following minimum guidelines may be

followed.

Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE)

( Theory – 100 Marks)

Evaluation method Course with Assignment

Quiz -1 10

Test -1 30

Quiz -2 10

Quiz -3 10

Test -2 30

Assignment 10

Total 100

Semester End Evaluation

Theory (100)

Part- –A

Objective type questions 20

Part –B

There should be five questions from five units. Each question should be for maximum

of 16 Marks.

The UNIT-1, UNIT-4 and UNIT-5 should not have any choice.

The UNIT-2 and UNIT-3 should have an internal choice.

Both the questions should be of the same complexity in terms of COs and Bloom’s

taxonomy level.

80

Total 100

Page 177: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

177

Note: The faculty teaching the course may adapt additional methods for evaluation

within the total maximum marks.

Page 178: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

178

What To

whom

Frequency

of

conductio

n

Max

Mark

s

Evidence Contribution to

Course Outcome

Dir

ect

Ass

essm

ent

Met

hod

s CIE

Quiz

Student

s

Three 30 Answer

Scripts 80

%

100

%

90

%

Test Two 60/50

Assignment/Self

-study 2 phases 10/20

Reports /

Record

Books Laboratory Weekly 50

SE

E

Semester End

Examination

End of

every

semester

Consisting

of Part-A

and Part-B

100

Answer

Scripts

20

%

Semester End

Laboratory

End of

every

semester

laboratory

50

Ind

irec

t A

ssess

men

t

met

hod

s

Course End Survey Student

s

End of

course

Questionnair

e

Based on

COs

10%

Note: Individual faculty may adopt various methods for conducting effective quizzes

and evaluate the same. The frequency of quizzes may be more than three also.

CO-PO Mapping

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 M --- L --- L --- --- --- L --- ---

CO2 H M M L L --- --- --- L --- ---

CO3 H M M L L --- --- --- L --- ---

CO4 H H M M L --- --- --- --- --- ---

Low-1Medium-2 High-3

Page 179: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

179

Semester: VII

Course Title: SATELLITE COMMUNICATIONS

Course Code: 16TE7F3 CIE Marks: 100

Hrs/Week: L:T:P:S: 4:0:0:0 SEE Marks: 100

Credits: 04 SEE Duration: 3Hrs

Course Learning Objectives: The students will be able to

1 Classification of satellites, orbital parameters, Launch vehicles and basic principles of

satellite communication.

2 Explain the various subsystems of Satellite and Earth Station.

3 Explain and differentiate multiple access techniques.

4 Analyze and design of satellite links.

UNIT-I

Introduction to Satellites and their Applications:Ever-expanding Application

Spectrum, What is a Satellite?, History of the Evolution of Satellites, Evolution of

Launch Vehicles, Future Trends,

Satellite Orbits and Trajectories :Definition of an Orbit and a Trajectory,

Orbiting Satellites – Basic Principles, Orbital Parameters, Injection Velocity and

Resulting Satellite Trajectories, Types of Satellite Orbits .

09 Hrs

UNIT II

Satellite Launch and In-orbit Operations :Acquiring the Desired Orbit, Launch

Sequence, Orbital Perturbations, Satellite Stabilization, Orbital Effects on

Satellite’s Performance, Look Angles of a Satellite, Earth Coverage and Ground

Tracks.

09 Hrs

UNIT III

Satellite Hardware: Satellite Subsystems, Mechanical Structure, Propulsion

Subsystem, Thermal Control Subsystem, Power Supply Subsystem, Attitude and

Orbit Control, Tracking, Telemetry and Command Subsystem, Payload, Antenna

Subsystem, Space Qualification and Equipment Reliability.

Earth Station: Types of Earth Station, Earth Station Architecture, Earth Station

Design Considerations, Earth Station Testing, Earth Station Hardware, Satellite

Tracking

09 Hrs

UNIT IV

Satellite Link Design Fundamentals : Transmission Equation, Satellite Link

Parameters, Frequency Considerations, Propagation Considerations, Techniques

to Counter Propagation Effects, Noise Considerations, Interference-related

Problems, Antenna Gain-to-Noise Temperature (G/T) Ratio, Link Design.

09 Hrs

UNIT V

Multiple Access Techniques: Introduction to Frequency Division Multiple

Assignment and Access,FDMA - Single Channel Per Carrier (SCPC) Systems,

Multiple Channels Per Carrier (MCPC) Systems, Space Domain Multiple Access

(SDMA). Concepts of Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) -TDMA Frame

Structure, TDMA Burst Structure, Computing Unique Word Detection

Probability, TDMA Frame Efficiency, Control and Coordination of Traffic, Frame

Acquisition and Synchronization. Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA),

concept of CDMA/SS and CDMA/FH.

09 Hrs

Course Outcomes: After completing the course, the students will be able to

1 Explain various Orbital Parameters, Satellite Link Parameters, and Propagation

Page 180: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

180

Considerations.

2 Analyze Orbital Mechanics, TT&C and other design issues.

3 Apply multiple Access Techniques in Satellite Communication

4 Design Basic Satellite Link system for Uplink and Downlink and Evaluate C/N overall

for the Link.

Reference Books

1. Anil K Maini, Varsha Agarwal, “Satellite Technology - Principles and Applications", Second

Edition, John Wiley and Sons, 2011 ISBN: 9780470660249

2. K N Raja Rao, “Satellite Communication Concepts and applications”, PHI, 2013, 2nd

Edition, ISBN: 978-81-203-4725-0.

3. Timothy Pratt, Charles W. Bostian, “Satellite Communication”, John Wiley & Sons,

2nd Edition, 2012, ISBN: 9814126845.

In case of a course having only theory, the following minimum guidelines may be

followed.

Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE)

( Theory – 100 Marks)

Evaluation method Course with Assignment

Quiz -1 10

Test -1 30

Quiz -2 10

Quiz -3 10

Test -2 30

Assignment 10

Total 100

Semester End Evaluation

Theory (100)

Part- –A

Objective type questions 20

Part –B

There should be five questions from five units. Each question should be for maximum

of 16 Marks.

The UNIT-1, UNIT-4 and UNIT-5 should not have any choice.

The UNIT-2 and UNIT-3 should have an internal choice.

Both the questions should be of the same complexity in terms of COs and Bloom’s

taxonomy level.

80

Total 100

Note: The faculty teaching the course may adapt additional methods for evaluation

within the total maximum marks.

Page 181: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

181

What To

whom

Frequency

of

conductio

n

Max

Mark

s

Evidence Contribution to

Course Outcome

Dir

ect

Ass

essm

ent

Met

hod

s CIE

Quiz

Student

s

Three 30 Answer

Scripts 80

%

100

%

90

%

Test Two 60/50

Assignment/Self

-study 2 phases 10/20

Reports /

Record

Books Laboratory Weekly 50

SE

E

Semester End

Examination

End of

every

semester

Consisting

of Part-A

and Part-B

100

Answer

Scripts

20

%

Semester End

Laboratory

End of

every

semester

laboratory

50

Ind

irec

t A

ssess

men

t

met

hod

s

Course End Survey Student

s

End of

course

Questionnair

e

Based on

COs

10%

Note: Individual faculty may adopt various methods for conducting effective quizzes

and evaluate the same. The frequency of quizzes may be more than three also.

CO-PO Mapping

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 H --- --- ---- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

CO2 H M --- M --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

CO3 H --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

CO4 H H H --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- M

Low-1Medium-2 High-3

Page 182: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

182

Semester: VII

Course Title: REAL TIME EMBEDDED SYSTEMS

Course Code: 16TE7F4 CIE Marks: 100

Hrs/Week: L:T:P:S: 4:0:0:0 SEE Marks: 100

Credits: 04 SEE Duration: 3Hrs

Course Learning Objectives: The students will be able to

1 Describe the concepts and system components of embedded system.

2 Interpret embedded system, general computing systems and the issues that arises in

designing real-time systems.

3 Illustrate the Design and Development of the Program model.

4 Analyze the concepts of hardware debugging

5 Evaluate and apply the concepts of RTOS, IPC‘s and Semaphores in real time

embedded system

UNIT-I

Embedded System :

Core of the Embedded System, Memory, Sensors and Actuators, Communication

Interface, Onboard Communication Interface, External Communication Interface,

Embedded Firmware, Other System Components-Reset Circuit, Brown out

Protection Circuit, Oscillator Unit, Real Time Clock, Watch Dog Timer.

Embedded System-Application and Domain Specific :

Washing Machine-Application Specific Case Study, Automotive-Domain Specific

Case Study, Digital Camera, Smart Card.

09 Hrs

UNIT-II

Characteristics and Quality Attributes of Embedded Systems :

Characteristics of Embedded system, Quality Attributes of an Embedded System,

Non-Operational Quality attributes.

Hardware Software Co-Design and Program Modelling: Fundamental Issues in Hardware Software Co-Design, Computational Models in

Embedded Design, Introduction to Unified Modelling Language, Hardware

Software Trade-offs.

09 Hrs

UNIT-III

Embedded Firmware Design and Development :

Embedded Firmware Design Approaches, Embedded Firmware Development

Languages.

The Embedded System Development Environment :

The Integrated Development Environment (IDE), Types of Files Generated on

Cross-compilation, Disassembler/ Decompiler, Simulators, Emulators and

Debugging, Target Hardware Debugging, Boundary Scan.

09 Hrs

UNIT-IV

RTOS -Tasks, Semaphores, Message Queues :

Introduction, defining an RTOS, the scheduler, objects, services, key

characteristics of an RTOS ,defining a task, task states and scheduling, types of

task operations, typical task structure, synchronization, communication and

concurrency , defining Semaphore, typical Semaphore operations, typical

Semaphore use.

09 Hrs

UNIT-V

Page 183: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

183

IPC and Synchronization Defining message queues, message queues states, message queues content, pipes,

event registers, signals, condition variables. Synchronization, Communication

Resource Synchronization, Critical Section revisited.

09 Hrs

Course Outcomes: After completing the course, the students will be able to

1 Identify the concepts of system components to assemble small embedded systems.

2 Interpret the synchronization of system components in embedded systems.

3 Apply the key concepts of real time in Embedded system design.

4 Design an embedded system for a given application

Reference Books

1. Shibu K V, “Introduction to Embedded Systems”, Tata McGraw Hill Education

Private Limited; 2009, ISBN: 10: 0070678790

2. Qing Li, “Real-Time Concepts for Embedded Systems”, CMP publishers, Edition,

2003.

3. James K Peckol, “Embedded Systems – A contemporary Design Tool”, John Weily,

2008, ISBN:0-444-51616-6.

In case of a course having only theory, the following minimum guidelines may be

followed.

Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE)

( Theory – 100 Marks)

Evaluation method Course with Assignment

Quiz -1 10

Test -1 30

Quiz -2 10

Quiz -3 10

Test -2 30

Assignment 10

Total 100

Semester End Evaluation

Theory (100)

Part- –A

Objective type questions 20

Part –B

There should be five questions from five units. Each question should be for maximum

of 16 Marks.

The UNIT-1, UNIT-4 and UNIT-5 should not have any choice.

The UNIT-2 and UNIT-3 should have an internal choice.

Both the questions should be of the same complexity in terms of COs and Bloom’s

taxonomy level.

80

Total 100

Page 184: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

184

Note: The faculty teaching the course may adapt additional methods for evaluation

within the total maximum marks.

Page 185: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

185

What To

whom

Frequency

of

conductio

n

Max

Mark

s

Evidence Contribution to

Course Outcome

Dir

ect

Ass

essm

ent

Met

hod

s CIE

Quiz

Student

s

Three 30 Answer

Scripts 80

%

100

%

90

%

Test Two 60/50

Assignment/Self

-study 2 phases 10/20

Reports /

Record

Books Laboratory Weekly 50

SE

E

Semester End

Examination

End of

every

semester

Consisting

of Part-A

and Part-B

100

Answer

Scripts

20

%

Semester End

Laboratory

End of

every

semester

laboratory

50

Ind

irec

t A

ssess

men

t

met

hod

s

Course End Survey Student

s

End of

course

Questionnair

e

Based on

COs

10%

Note: Individual faculty may adopt various methods for conducting effective quizzes

and evaluate the same. The frequency of quizzes may be more than three also.

CO-PO Mapping

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 H L --- --- --- --- --- --- L --- --- ---

CO2 H L --- --- --- --- --- --- L --- --- ---

CO3 H H H M M --- --- --- M --- --- M

CO4 H H H M M --- --- --- H --- --- M

Low-1Medium-2 High-3

Page 186: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

186

Semester: VII

Course Title: CELLULAR MOBILE NETWORK

Course Code: 16 TE7G1 CIE Marks: 100

Hrs/Week: L:T:P:S: 4:0:0:0 SEE Marks: 100

Credits: 04 SEE Duration: 3Hrs

Course Learning Objectives: The students will be able to

1 Describe Wireless networks, architecture of wireless networks and cell acquisition.

2 Analyze the concepts protocols used, spectrum allocation.

3 Compare the concepts of different standards and their architecture.

4 Differentiate wireless networks for various applications and QoS

UNIT-I

Basics of Wireless Networks: Wireless Network, Wireless switching technology,

Wireless Communication Problems, Wireless Network reference model, Wireless

Networking issues, Wireless Networking standards.

08 Hrs

UNIT-II

Architectural Review of UMTS and GSM: History of Mobile

Telecommunication Systems, LTE ,UMTS to LTE, LTE-Advanced,3GPP

Specifications for LTE.

Architecture of LTE:Communication Protocols , Bearer Management, Spectrum

Allocation Wireless Communications, Radio Transmission and Reception,

Multipath fading and inter symbol interference, Error Management

08 Hrs

UNIT-III

Architecture of the LTE Air Interface: Air Interface Protocol Stack, Logical,

Transport and Physical Channels, The Resource Grid, Multiple Antenna

Transmission, Resource Element Mapping

Cell Acquisition: Acquisition Procedure, Synchronization Signals, Downlink

Reference Signals, Physical Broadcast Channel, Physical Control Format

Indicator Channel, System Information, Procedures After Acquisition

08 Hrs

UNIT-IV

Data transmission and reception: Data Transmission Procedures, Transmission

of Scheduling Messages on the PDCCH, Data Transmission on the PDSCH and

PUSCH, Transmission of Hybrid ARQ Indicators on the PHICH, Uplink Control

Information. Transmission of Uplink Control Information on the PUCCH ,Uplink

Reference Signals, Uplink Power Control, Discontinuous Reception

08 Hrs

UNIT-V

Quality of service

Policy and Charging Control, Quality of Service Parameters, Policy Control

Architecture, Session Management Procedures, Charging and Billing

08 Hrs

Course Outcomes: After completing the course, the students will be able to

1 Explain Wireless networks, architecture of wireless networks and cell acquisition.

2 Analyze the concepts protocols used, spectrum allocation.

3 Apply the concepts of different standards and their architecture.

4 Evaluate wireless networks for various applications and QoS.

Reference Books

Page 187: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

187

1. Christopher Cox; An Introduction to LTE; Wiley 2012(e-Book)

2. SteffeniaSesia, IssamToufik, Matthew Baker; LTE-The UMTS long term evolution,

Wiley 2011(e-Book)

In case of a course having only theory, the following minimum guidelines may be

followed.

Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE)

( Theory – 100 Marks)

Evaluation method Course with Assignment

Quiz -1 10

Test -1 30

Quiz -2 10

Quiz -3 10

Test -2 30

Assignment 10

Total 100

Semester End Evaluation

Theory (100)

Part- –A

Objective type questions 20

Part –B

There should be five questions from five units. Each question should be for maximum

of 16 Marks.

The UNIT-1, UNIT-4 and UNIT-5 should not have any choice.

The UNIT-2 and UNIT-3 should have an internal choice.

Both the questions should be of the same complexity in terms of COs and Bloom’s

taxonomy level.

80

Total 100

Note: The faculty teaching the course may adapt additional methods for evaluation

within the total maximum marks.

Page 188: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

188

What To

whom

Frequency

of

conductio

n

Max

Mark

s

Evidence Contribution to

Course Outcome

Dir

ect

Ass

ess

men

t M

eth

od

s CIE

Quiz

Student

s

Three 30 Answer

Scripts 80

%

100

%

90

%

Test Two 60/50

Assignment/Self

-study 2 phases 10/20

Reports /

Record

Books Laboratory Weekly 50

SE

E

Semester End

Examination

End of

every

semester

Consisting

of Part-A

and Part-B

100

Answer

Scripts

20

%

Semester End

Laboratory

End of

every

semester

laboratory

50

Ind

irec

t A

ssess

men

t

met

hod

s

Course End Survey Student

s

End of

course

Questionnair

e

Based on

COs

10%

Note: Individual faculty may adopt various methods for conducting effective quizzes

and evaluate the same. The frequency of quizzes may be more than three also.

CO-PO Mapping

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 --- L L --- --- --- --- --- --- L --- ---

CO2 --- M M H --- --- --- --- --- H --- M

CO3 M H H --- M --- --- --- --- M --- L

CO4 M H M M --- --- --- --- --- M --- H

Low-1Medium-2 High-3

Page 189: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

189

Semester: VII

Course Title: DSP APPLICATIONS

Course Code: 16TE7G2 CIE Marks: 100

Hrs/Week: L:T:P:S: 4:0:0:0 SEE Marks: 100

Credits: 04 SEE Duration: 3Hrs

Course Learning Objectives: The students will be able to

1 Explain the process of up sampling and down sampling of signals.

2 Design the filter banks and M-channel QMF bank.

3 Design an adaptive filter based on LMS/RLS algorithm for different applications

4 Explain the various concepts of Image Processing such as filtering, histogram,

compression etc.

5 Describe various applications such as audio, CD ,mobile, telephony and set top box.

UNIT-I

FIR filter Design:

FIR filter Characteristics, Specifications, design steps; Coefficient calculation;

Window Method; Optimal Method; Frequency Sampling Method; Comparison of

different methods; Structures for FIR filters – Linear Phase and Lattice methods.

08 Hrs

UNIT-II

Multi-rate Digital Signal Processing:

Introduction, Concepts of multirate signal processing – decimation, interpolation,

sampling rate conversion; design of practical sampling rate converters; Poly phase

structures for sampling rate conversion. Application Examples.

08 Hrs

UNIT-III

Adaptive Filters:

Use of adaptive filters; Concepts of adaptive filtering; Weiner filter theory; Basic

LMS adaptive algorithm; Recursive least squares algorithm;

Applications – Noise cancellation, System modelling, adaptive telephone echo

cancellation, multi-path effect cancellation, Jammer suppression, adaptive signal

enhancement;

08 Hrs

UNIT-IV

Image Processing Basics:

Notation and Data formats; Histogram and Equalization; Image level adjustment

and contrast; Image filtering enhancement; Pseudo-color generation and detection;

Image spectra; Image compression.

08 Hrs

UNIT-V

Applications:

Audio applications – digital audio mixing, speech synthesis and recognition, CD

digital audio system, High quality ADC for digital audio, DAC for hi-fi systems,

multirate narrow band digital filtering, high resolution narrow band spectral

analysis. CD recording system,

Transmultiplexers – TDM to FDM conversion, FDM to TDM conversion;

Telecommunication applications – digital cellular mobile telephony, set-top box

for digital TV.

08 Hrs

Course Outcomes: After completing the course, the students will be able to

1 Explain the importance and functions of Decimator, Interpolator, Adaptive filters and its

Page 190: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

190

applications.

2 Apply different DSP operations for various data.

3 Design and Analyze filter banks and Adaptive filters.

4 Develop signal processing algorithms for various applications

Reference Books

1. E.C.Ifeachor and B.W.Jervis, “Digital Signal Processing – A Practical approach”,

Second edition, Pearson Education, 2002

2. Li Tan, “Digital Signal Processing – Fundamentals and Applications”, Elsevier, 2008.

3. Proakis and Monolakias, “ Digital Signal Processing”, 4th edition, Pearson/PHI, 2006,

ISBN: 81-317-1000-9.

In case of a course having only theory, the following minimum guidelines may be

followed.

Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE)

( Theory – 100 Marks)

Evaluation method Course with Assignment

Quiz -1 10

Test -1 30

Quiz -2 10

Quiz -3 10

Test -2 30

Assignment 10

Total 100

Semester End Evaluation

Theory (100)

Part- –A

Objective type questions 20

Part –B

There should be five questions from five units. Each question should be for maximum

of 16 Marks.

The UNIT-1, UNIT-4 and UNIT-5 should not have any choice.

The UNIT-2 and UNIT-3 should have an internal choice.

Both the questions should be of the same complexity in terms of COs and Bloom’s

taxonomy level.

80

Total 100

Note: The faculty teaching the course may adapt additional methods for evaluation

within the total maximum marks.

Page 191: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

191

What To

whom

Frequency

of

conductio

n

Max

Mark

s

Evidence Contribution to

Course Outcome

Dir

ect

Ass

essm

ent

Met

hod

s CIE

Quiz

Student

s

Three 30 Answer

Scripts 80

%

100

%

90

%

Test Two 60/50

Assignment/Self

-study 2 phases 10/20

Reports /

Record

Books Laboratory Weekly 50

SE

E

Semester End

Examination

End of

every

semester

Consisting

of Part-A

and Part-B

100

Answer

Scripts

20

%

Semester End

Laboratory

End of

every

semester

laboratory

50

Ind

irec

t A

ssess

men

t

met

hod

s

Course End Survey Student

s

End of

course

Questionnair

e

Based on

COs

10%

Note: Individual faculty may adopt various methods for conducting effective quizzes

and evaluate the same. The frequency of quizzes may be more than three also.

CO-PO Mapping

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 H --- H --- H --- --- --- L --- --- M

CO2 H --- H --- H --- --- M L M --- M

CO3 H H --- H M L --- --- --- --- --- M

CO4 M M L M --- H M --- M M M H

Low-1Medium-2 High-3

Page 192: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

192

Semester: VII

Course Title: ADHOC NETWORKS

Course Code: 16TE7G3 CIE Marks:100

Hrs/Week: L:T:P:S: 4:0:0:0 SEE Marks: 100

Credits: 04 SEE Duration: 3Hrs

Course Learning Objectives: The students will be able to

1 Understand the basics and applications of Ad -hoc Networks.

2 Learn various fundamental and emerging protocols of all layers in ad-hoc network.

3 Study the issues pertaining to major obstacles in establishment and efficient

management of ad-hoc networks.

4 Understand various security practices and protocols of Ad-hoc Networks.

UNIT-I

ADHOC NETWORKS AND MAC PROTOCOLS Ad hoc wireless networks : Introduction,Issues in Ad hoc wireless networks, Ad

hoc wireless internet .

MAC protocols for ad hoc wireless networks: Introduction, Issues in designing a

MAC protocol for ad hoc wireless networks, Design goals of a MAC protocol

for Ad hoc wireless networks, Classifications of MAC protocols, Contention-

based protocols, Contention-based protocols with reservation mechanisms,

Contention-based MAC protocols with scheduling mechanisms

08 Hrs

UNIT II

ROUTING PROTOCOLS FOR AD HOC WIRELESS NETWORKS :

Issues in Designing a Routing Protocol for Ad Hoc Wireless Networks ,

Classifications of Routing Protocols ,Table Driven Routing Protocols ,

Destination Sequenced Distance Vector (DSDV),Wireless Routing Protocol

(WRP) , Cluster – Head Gateway Switch Routing Protocol , Source Initiated On

Demand Approaches :Ad hoc On Demand Distance Vector Routing (AODV) ,

Dynamic Source Routing (DSR) , Temporally Ordered Routing Algorithm

(TORA) , Signal Stability Routing (SSR) , Location Aided Routing (LAR) , Zone

Routing Protocol (ZRP), Zone-Based Hierarchical Link State Routing Protocol.

08 Hrs

UNIT III

MULTICAST ROUTING IN AD HOC WIRELESS NETWORKS:

Issues in Designing a Multicast Routing Protocol ,Operation of Multicast Routing

Protocols , An Architecture Reference Model for Multicast Routing

Protocols,Classifications of Multicast Routing Protocols , Tree Based Multicast

Routing Protocols, Mesh Based Multicast Routing Protocols, Summary of Tree

and Mesh based Protocols , Energy Efficient Multicasting , Multicasting with

Quality of Service Guarantees, Application Dependent Multicast Routing.

08 Hrs

UNIT IV

TRANSPORT LAYER AND SECURITY: Issues in Designing a Transport Layer Protocol for Adhoc Wireless Networks ,

Design Goals of a Transport Layer Protocol for Adhoc Wireless Networks,

Classification of Transport Layer Solutions , TCP over Ad hoc Wireless

Networks, Security in Ad Hoc Wireless Networks ,Network Security

Requirements , Issues and Challenges in Security Provisioning , Network Security

Attacks , Key Management , Secure Routing in Ad hoc Wireless Networks.

08 Hrs

UNIT V

QoSand Energy Management: 08 Hrs

Page 193: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

193

Issues and Challenges in Providing QoS in Ad hoc Wireless Networks,

Classifications of QoS Solutions, MAC Layer Solutions, Network Layer

Solutions,QoS Frameworks for Ad hoc Wireless Networks.

ENERGY MANAGEMENT IN AD HOC WIRELESS NETWORKS :

Introduction , Need for Energy Management in Ad hoc Wireless Networks

,Classification of Energy Management Schemes , Battery Management Schemes ,

Transmission Power Management Schemes ,System Power Management

Schemes.

Course Outcomes: After completing the course, the students will be able to

1 Explain the concepts and applications of ad-hoc networks.

2 Analyze the technology trends for the implementation and deployment of wireless Ad-

hoc networks

3 Analyze the challenges in designing protocol stacks for ad-hoc networks.

4 Evaluate solutions to manage QoS and Energy efficiency

Reference Books

1. C. Siva Ram Murthy and B. S. Manoj, “Ad Hoc Wireless Networks Architectures and

Protocols”, Prentice Hall, PTR, 2004. ISBN, 013147023X.

2. K. Toh, “Ad Hoc Mobile Wireless Networks Protocols and Systems”, Prentice Hall,

PTR,2001. ISBN, 0130078174.

3. Charles E. Perkins, “Ad Hoc Networking”, Addison Wesley, 2000. ISBN-13: 978-

0321579072

In case of a course having only theory, the following minimum guidelines may be

followed.

Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE)

( Theory – 100 Marks)

Evaluation method Course with Assignment

Quiz -1 10

Test -1 25

Quiz -2 10

Quiz -3 10

Test -2 25

Assignment 20

Total 100

Semester End Evaluation

Theory (100)

Part- –A

Objective type questions 20

Part –B

There should be five questions from five units. Each question should be for maximum

of 16 Marks.

The UNIT-1, UNIT-4 and UNIT-5 should not have any choice.

80

Page 194: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

194

The UNIT-2 and UNIT-3 should have an internal choice.

Both the questions should be of the same complexity in terms of COs and Bloom’s

taxonomy level.

Total 100

Note: The faculty teaching the course may adapt additional methods for evaluation

within the total maximum marks.

Page 195: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

195

What To

whom

Frequency

of

conductio

n

Max

Mark

s

Evidence Contribution to

Course Outcome

Dir

ect

Ass

essm

ent

Met

hod

s CIE

Quiz

Student

s

Three 30 Answer

Scripts 80

%

100

%

90

%

Test Two 60/50

Assignment/Self

-study 2 phases 10/20

Reports /

Record

Books Laboratory Weekly 50

SE

E

Semester End

Examination

End of

every

semester

Consisting

of Part-A

and Part-B

100

Answer

Scripts

20

%

Semester End

Laboratory

End of

every

semester

laboratory

50

Ind

irec

t A

ssess

men

t

met

hod

s

Course End Survey Student

s

End of

course

Questionnair

e

Based on

COs

10%

Note: Individual faculty may adopt various methods for conducting effective quizzes

and evaluate the same. The frequency of quizzes may be more than three also.

CO-PO Mapping

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 L M --- M --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

CO2 H H --- H --- M --- --- L --- --- M

CO3 M H --- M --- M --- --- L --- --- M

CO4 M H --- H --- M --- --- L --- --- M

Low-1Medium-2 High-3

Page 196: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

196

Semester: VII

Course Title: INTERNET OF THINGS (IoT)

Course Code: 16TE7G4 CIE Marks: 100

Hrs/Week: L:T:P:S: 4:0:0:0 SEE Marks: 100

Credits: 04 SEE Duration: 3Hrs

Course Learning Objectives: The students will be able to

1 Understand the basics of Internet of Things.

2 Identify the applications of IoT with respect to today's aspect.

3 Analyze the importance of IoT protocols and architectures.

4 Create case studies for given applications of IoT.

UNIT-I

Introduction to Networking basics and Internet of Things

OSI Model, IP Addressing, Network Topologies, Sub-netting, History of IoT,

Definitions and Functional Requirements, Motivation, M2M communications,

Architecture, Ubiquitous IoT Applications, Four Pillars of IoT, IoT physical

entities, Introduction to Web Servers and Cloud Computing.

08 Hrs

UNIT – II

IoTCommunication Technologies:

IoT Communication Pattern, IoT protocol Architecture, NFC, RFID, Bluetooth,

BLE, Zigbee, Wifi, Rflinks, Mobile Internet, Wired Communication, The

6LoWPAN Security aspects in IoT, Mobility support, Design factors, Design

issues and challenges, Application Protocols: MQTT, HTTP, CoAP, MySQL.

08 Hrs

UNIT – III

IoT Web Services:

Introduction to WSDL, SOAP, REST, Role of web services (IoT perspective),

Web Services: Service Oriented Architecture: SOA to implement Web Services,

XML, SaaS, PaaS, IaaS, Public, Private and Hybrid cloud deployment models,

Benefits, challenges and risks of cloud computing models, Introduction to cloud

based IoT platforms like IBM Bluemix, carriotetc, Data Analytics / Big Data and

Data Visualization.

08 Hrs

UNIT – IV

IoT Application Development:

Back-end Application Designing Apache for handling HTTP Requests, PHP &

MySQL for data processing, MongoDB Object type Database, HTML, CSS &

jQuery for UI Designing, JSON lib for data processing, Security & Privacy during

development, Application Development for mobile Platforms: Overview of

Android / IOS App Development tools.

08 Hrs

UNIT – V

Data Modeling, Security and Interoperability:

Modes of attack: DoS, Guessing the credentials, Getting access to stored

credentials, Man in the middle, Sniffing network communication, Port scanning

and Web scrawling, Tools for achieving security: VPN, Need for Interoperability,

Case studies – Open Source e-Health sensor platform, Smart Grid – Electrical

Vehicle Charging and Other recent projects.

08 Hrs

Course Outcomes: After completing the course, the students will be able to

1 Explain fundamental concepts of Internet of Things.

2 Analyze various communication protocols for IoT.

Page 197: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

197

3 Develop web services to access IoT devices

4 Develop an IoT application and various case studies for the real time applications

Reference Books

1. Honbo Zhou, “The Internet of Things in the Cloud: A Middleware Perspective”, CRC

Press, Pages 391, 2012, ISBN: 9781439892992.

2. Dieter Uckelmann; Mark Harrison; Florian Michahelles, “Architecting the Internet

of Things”, Springer-Verlag Berlin Heidelberg, 2011, ISBN 978-3-642-19157-2,

3. Olivier Hersent, David Boswarthick, OmarElloumi, “The Internet of Things – Key

applications and Protocols”, Wiley, Pages: 370, ISBN: 978-1-119-99435-0, 2012.

4. ArshdeepBahga, Vijay Madisetti, “Internet of Things – A hands-on approach”,

Universities Press, Orient Blackswan Private Limited , Pages: 520 Pages, ISBN:

978-8173719547 2015.

In case of a course having only theory, the following minimum guidelines may be

followed.

Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE)

( Theory – 100 Marks)

Evaluation method Course with Assignment

Quiz -1 10

Test -1 25

Quiz -2 10

Quiz -3 10

Test -2 25

Assignment 20

Total 100

Semester End Evaluation

Theory (100)

Part- –A

Objective type questions 20

Part –B

There should be five questions from five units. Each question should be for maximum

of 16 Marks.

The UNIT-1, UNIT-4 and UNIT-5 should not have any choice.

The UNIT-2 and UNIT-3 should have an internal choice.

Both the questions should be of the same complexity in terms of COs and Bloom’s

taxonomy level.

80

Total 100

Note: The faculty teaching the course may adapt additional methods for evaluation

within the total maximum marks.

Page 198: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

198

What To

whom

Frequency

of

conductio

n

Max

Mark

s

Evidence Contribution to

Course Outcome

Dir

ect

Ass

essm

ent

Met

hod

s CIE

Quiz

Student

s

Three 30 Answer

Scripts 80

%

100

%

90

%

Test Two 60/50

Assignment/Self

-study 2 phases 10/20

Reports /

Record

Books Laboratory Weekly 50

SE

E

Semester End

Examination

End of

every

semester

Consisting

of Part-A

and Part-B

100

Answer

Scripts

20

%

Semester End

Laboratory

End of

every

semester

laboratory

50

Ind

irec

t A

ssess

men

t

met

hod

s

Course End Survey Student

s

End of

course

Questionnair

e

Based on

COs

10%

Note: Individual faculty may adopt various methods for conducting effective quizzes

and evaluate the same. The frequency of quizzes may be more than three also.

CO-PO Mapping

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 --- L --- --- --- M M M --- H --- L

CO2 --- L M H H --- --- M --- M --- M

CO3 --- --- H L M --- --- --- H M H L

CO4 --- M H M M H H H H M M M

Low-1Medium-2 High-3

Page 199: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

199

Semester: VII

Course Title: SPACE TECHNOLOGY AND APPLICATIONS

Course Code: 16GH7XX CIE Marks: 100

Hrs/Week: L:T:P:S: 3:0:0:0 SEE Marks: 100

Credits: 03 SEE Duration: 3Hrs

Course Learning Objectives: The students will be able to

1 Define the earth environment and its behavior, launching vehicles for satellites and its

associated concepts.

2 Analyze satellites in terms of technology, structure and communications.

3 Use satellites for space applications, remote sensing and metrology.

4 Apply the space technology, technology mission and advanced space systems to

nation’s growth.

UNIT-I

Earth’s environment: Atmosphere, ionosphere, Magnetosphere, Van Allen

Radiation belts, Interplanetary medium, Solar wind, Solar- Earth Weather

Relations.

Launch Vehicles: Rocketry, Propellants, Propulsion, Combustion, Solid, Liquid

and Cryogenic engines, Control and Guidance system, Ion propulsion and Nuclear

Propulsion.

08 Hrs

UNIT-II

Satellite Technology: Structural, Mechanical, Thermal, Power control,

Telemetry, Telecomm and, Quality and Reliability, Payloads, Space simulation.

Satellite structure: Satellite Communications, Transponders, Satellite Antennas.

08 Hrs

UNIT-III

Satellite Communications: LEO, MEO and GEO orbits, Altitude and orbit

controls, Multiple Access Techniques.

Space applications: Telephony, V-SAT, DBS system, Satellite Radio and TV,

Tele-Education, Tele-medicine, Satellite navigation, GPS.

08 Hrs

UNIT-IV

Remote Sensing: Visual bands, Agricultural, Crop vegetation, Forestry, water

Resources, Land use, Land mapping, geology, Urban development resource

management, image processing techniques.

Metrology:Weather forecast (Long term and Short term), weather modeling,

Cyclone predictions, Disaster and flood warning, rainfall predictions using

satellites.

08 Hrs

UNIT-V

Satellite payloads: Technology missions, deep space planetary missions, Lunar

missions, zero gravity experiments, space biology and International space

Missions.

Advanced space systems: Remote sensing cameras, planetary payloads, space

shuttle, space station, Inter-space communication systems.

08 Hrs

Course Outcomes: After completing the course, the students will be able to

1 Explain different types of satellites, orbit and associated subsystems.

2 Apply the basics of launching vehicles, satellites and sub systems for space applications.

Page 200: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

200

3 Analyze the applications of satellite in the area of communication, remote sensing,

metrology etc.,

4 Study technology trends, satellite missions and advanced space systems.

Reference Books

1. R G Barry, “Atmosphere, weather and climate”, Routledge publications, 2009. ISBN-

10: 0415465702

2. K N Raja Rao, “Fundamentals of Satellite Communication”, PHI, 2012. ISBN.

9788120324015

3. Timothy pratt, “Satellite Communication” John Wiley, 1986 ISBN: 978-0-471-37007-

9 ISBN 10: 047137007X

4. B C Panda, “Remote sensing and applications” VIVA books Pvt. Ltd., 2009 ISBN-

10: 8176496308

In case of a course having only theory, the following minimum guidelines may be

followed.

Continuous Internal Evaluation (CIE)

( Theory – 100 Marks)

Evaluation method Course with Assignment

Quiz -1 10

Test -1 30

Quiz -2 10

Quiz -3 10

Test -2 30

Assignment 10

Total 100

Semester End Evaluation

Theory (100)

Part- –A

Objective type questions 20

Part –B

There should be five questions from five units. Each question should be for maximum

of 16 Marks.

The UNIT-1, UNIT-4 and UNIT-5 should not have any choice.

The UNIT-2 and UNIT-3 should have an internal choice.

Both the questions should be of the same complexity in terms of COs and Bloom’s

taxonomy level.

80

Total 100

Note: The faculty teaching the course may adapt additional methods for evaluation

within the total maximum marks.

Page 201: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

201

What To

whom

Frequency

of

conductio

n

Max

Mark

s

Evidence Contribution to

Course Outcome

Dir

ect

Ass

essm

ent

Met

hod

s CIE

Quiz

Student

s

Three 30 Answer

Scripts 80

%

100

%

90

%

Test Two 60/50

Assignment/Self

-study 2 phases 10/20

Reports /

Record

Books Laboratory Weekly 50

SE

E

Semester End

Examination

End of

every

semester

Consisting

of Part-A

and Part-B

100

Answer

Scripts

20

%

Semester End

Laboratory

End of

every

semester

laboratory

50

Ind

irec

t A

ssess

men

t

met

hod

s

Course End Survey Student

s

End of

course

Questionnair

e

Based on

COs

10%

Note: Individual faculty may adopt various methods for conducting effective quizzes

and evaluate the same. The frequency of quizzes may be more than three also.

CO-PO Mapping

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 M L --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- L ---

CO2 M M L L --- --- --- --- --- --- L ---

CO3 M M L --- --- --- --- --- --- --- L ---

CO4 M M L --- --- --- --- --- --- --- L ---

Low-1Medium-2 High-3

Page 202: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

202

Semester: VIII

Course Title: MAJOR PROJECT

Course Code:16TEP81 CIE Marks: 100

Hrs/Week: L:T:P:S: 0:0:16:0 SEE Marks: 100

Credits: 16 SEE Duration: 3Hrs

Course Learning Objectives: The students will be able to

1

2

3

4

5

6

UNIT-I

Hrs

UNIT-II

Hrs

UNIT-III

Hrs

UNIT-IV

Hrs

UNIT-V

Hrs

Page 203: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

203

Course Outcomes: After completing the course, the students will be able to

1

2

3

4

What To

whom

Frequency

of

conductio

n

Max

Mark

s

Evidence Contribution to

Course Outcome

Dir

ect

Ass

essm

ent

Met

hod

s CIE

Quiz

Student

s

Three 30 Answer

Scripts 80

%

100

%

90

%

Test Two 60/50

Assignment/Self

-study 2 phases 10/20

Reports /

Record

Books Laboratory Weekly 50

SE

E

Semester End

Examination

End of

every

semester

Consisting

of Part-A

and Part-B

100

Answer

Scripts

20

%

Semester End

Laboratory

End of

every

semester

laboratory

50

Ind

irec

t A

ssess

men

t

met

hod

s

Course End Survey Student

s

End of

course

Questionnair

e

Based on

COs

10%

Note: Individual faculty may adopt various methods for conducting effective quizzes

and evaluate the same. The frequency of quizzes may be more than three also.

CO-PO Mapping

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1

CO2

CO3

CO4

Low-1Medium-2 High-3

Page 204: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

204

Semester: VIII

Course Title: TECHNICAL SEMINAR

Course Code:16TES82 CIE Marks: 50

Hrs/Week: L:T:P:S: 0:0:2:0 SEE Marks: --

Credits: 02 SEE Duration: --Hrs

Course Learning Objectives: The students will be able to

1

2

3

4

5

6

UNIT-I

Hrs

UNIT-II

Hrs

UNIT-III

Hrs

UNIT-IV

Hrs

UNIT-V

Hrs

Course Outcomes: After completing the course, the students will be able to

Page 205: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

205

1

2

3

4

What To

whom

Frequency

of

conductio

n

Max

Mark

s

Evidence Contribution to

Course Outcome

Dir

ect

Ass

essm

ent

Met

hod

s CIE

Quiz

Student

s

Three 30 Answer

Scripts 80

%

100

%

90

%

Test Two 60/50

Assignment/Self

-study 2 phases 10/20

Reports /

Record

Books Laboratory Weekly 50

SE

E

Semester End

Examination

End of

every

semester

Consisting

of Part-A

and Part-B

100

Answer

Scripts

20

%

Semester End

Laboratory

End of

every

semester

laboratory

50

Ind

irec

t A

ssess

men

t

met

hod

s

Course End Survey Student

s

End of

course

Questionnair

e

Based on

COs

10%

Note: Individual faculty may adopt various methods for conducting effective quizzes

and evaluate the same. The frequency of quizzes may be more than three also.

CO-PO Mapping

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1

CO2

CO3

CO4

Low-1Medium-2 High-3

Page 206: B.E-Telecommunication Engineering _Scheme_Syllabus.pdf · Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley & Sons, 9th Edition, 2007, ISBN: 978-81-265-3135-6. 2. N.P Bali

206